Home

DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem

1. 1E 1 8PSK Uncoded Theory Ed Turbo Typical Decoder Performance 1E 3 1 4 1 5 e 1E 6 1E 7 1E 8 Specification Turbo 0 793 1E 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Eb No in dB Figure 7 6 DMD50 8PSK BER Performance Turbo Note Eb No values include the effect of using interleaving and maximum iterations MN DMD50 Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem 7 22 7 BER Performance 16QAM Viterbi 1E 1 16QAM Uncoded Theory 1E 2 1E 3 Typical Performance 1E 4 1E 5 BER 1E 6 Specification 3 4 Rate 1E 7 Specification 7 8 Rate 1E 8 1E 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Eb No in dB Technical Specifications Viterbi Decoder 11 12 13 14 15 Figure 7 7 DMD50 16QAM BER Performance Viterbi Note Eb No values include the effect of using Differential Decoding and V 35 Descrambling MN DMD50 Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications 7 22 8 BER Performance 16QAM Viterbi with Reed Solomon 1E 1 16QAM Uncoded Theory 1E 2 Viterbi Decoder Reed Solomon 1E 3 Typical Performance 1E 4 1E5 m 1E 6 Specification 1E 7 3 4 Rate w RS Specification 7 8 Rate w RS
2. 1E 1 B O QPSK Uncoded Theory 1E 2 B O QPSK Uncoded Theory 1 2 Rate LDPC Decoder 1E 3 1E 4 Specification 1 2 Rate 1E5 eii 1 6 Typical Performance 1E 7 1E 8 1E 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Eb No in dB Figure 7 13 DMD50 Rate 1 2 B O QPSK BER Performance LDPC MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 22 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications 7 22 14 2 3 Rate Q 8PSK 8QAM BER Performance LDPC 1E 01 8PSK Uncoded Theory 1E 02 B O QPSK Uncoded Theory 2 3 Rate LDPC Decoder 1E 03 QPSK Specification 1E 04 Typical Performance 8QAM Specification 1E 05 BER 8PSK 1E 06 Specification 1E 07 1E 08 1E 09 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Eb No in dB Figure 7 14 DMD50 Rate 2 3 Q 8PSK 8QAM BER Performance LDPC MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 23 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications 7 22 15 3 4 Rate Q 8PSK 8 16QAM BER Performance LDPC 1E 01 8PSK Uncoded Theory 1 02 1 B O QPSK Uncoded Theory 2 3 Rate LDPC Decoder 1E 03 QPSK Specification 1E 04 Typical Performance 8QAM Specification 1E 05 BER 8PSK 1E 06 Specification 1E 07 1E 08 1E 09 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Eb No in dB Figure 7 15 DMD50 Rate
3. 1E 1 8PSK Uncoded Theory 1E 2 Turbo Decoder Specification 3 4 Rate 1E 3 Specification 7 8 Rate 1E 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Eb No in dB Figure 7 11 DMD50 8PSK BER Performance Turbo MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 20 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications 7 22 12 BER Performance 16QAM Turbo 1E 1 16QAM Uncoded Theory 1E 2 Turbo Decoder Specification 3 4 Rate 1 3 Specification 7 8 i Rate 1E 4 Typical 1 5 z 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Eb No in dB Figure 7 12 DMD50 16QAM BER Performance Turbo MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 21 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications 7 22 13 1 2 Rate B O QPSK BER Performance LDPC
4. MN DMD50 Revision 3 5 24 Chapter 6 Maintenance and 6 1 6 1 1 Troubleshooting This section discusses unit maintenance and troubleshooting for the Universal Satellite Modem A CAUTION The modem contains a Lithium Battery DANGER OF EXPLOSION exists if the battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries in accordance with local and national regulations Periodic Maintenance There is no external fuse on the modem The fuse is located on the power supply assembly inside the case and replacement is not intended in the field Clock Adjustment The modem allows for VCO speed adjustment from the front panel Clock adjustment should be performed only when an internal clock source has insufficient accuracy for the custom modem application MN DMD50 Revision 3 6 1 DMD50 Univeral Satellite Modem Maintenance and Troubleshooting 6 2 Troubleshooting Should a unit be suspected of a defect in field operations after all interface signals are verified the correct procedure is to replace the unit with another known working unit If this does not cure the problem wiring or power should be suspect The following is a brief list of possible problems that could be caused by failures of the modem or by improper setup and configuration for the type of service The list is arranged by possible symptoms exhibited by the modem
5. aset ense tete 3 5 3 3 1 Terminal wo cx 3 6 3 3 2 Modem Remote Communications RLLP esses esee eene enne 3 6 3 3 3 Ethernet Eee tre P Renee ro ea aca Pee RP Pee dete 3 6 3 3 4 Modem Monitor Status ier Fdo ETE ansaid en e ER ED ERE TEE ie Eee ge Reda 3 7 Table of Contents Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem MN DMD50 3 4 Async Port ES ES Communications scssssccssssssssscesssscssssccsscssssscssssescssscscsscssssssssssasessses 3 7 3 5 Internal Clock PE 3 7 3 6 Loopback Features Terrestrial amp IF ccsscsssssssssscsssscsssscssssscsssscssesssssesssscssssssessessssssscees 3 8 3 7 era enr eji CC 3 11 3 7 1 Clock Options 4 2 tee 3 11 3 7 1 1 SCTE Serial Clock Transmit External nennen eene 3 12 3 7 1 2 SET Senal Clock Transmit re tree e eere e 3 12 3 7 2 RX Butter Clock Optons rete ettet esce Een 3 12 37 21 Clock iin rod mm ntu 3 13 3 7 2 2 SCTE Serial Clock Transmit 3 13 3 7 2 3 SCT Clock Dransmit niece dire edere e tape ie eee Pekin ex Fade i 3 13 3 7 2 4 EXT CLK EXT BNC External Clock J16 sese 3 13 37 23 EXTIDE Insert Data In iie ient ttt L
6. 4 eee ee ecce esee ee ee eee seen sese ense eto setae s tease seen sete se setas essen ae F 3 E4 MEN Dice M or F 3 F 5 Testing the Ethernet Connection using the Ping Program Optional F 6 APPENDIX G AUPG OPERATION itte tan oim ento teeth Eno cheer G 1 G 1 Automatic Uplink Power Control AUPC Operation 4 eere eere eee eren eee ee seen ae etnas G 1 GIL RulyneAUPC e db iv aD t is o G 1 G12 JBE AUPGOSOL Gg Deque UN G 2 Table of Contents Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem MN DMD50 G 1 3 Near 6 Dig G 2 APPENDIX H DROP AND INSERT D amp l esee H 1 ILI Dropand Insert DD sesiiiccsosscsiscdcaccossvessdbesessodss sovssaestesecsassovesssssecsocasessessastesscsesessestessecsssnsosses H 1 H 1 1 Drop Only EN H 3 H 1 2 Insert Only en Rae eh a E ee een H 3 H 1 3 5 db Ro te e tad e eb ege oo e dente H 4 Enter UH e tr eerte roi a H 4 IL1 3 2 PCMES0Q ien eet eet encore rene e faa rabie e io ean bet e de EE H 4 3IPEMPS T cheer en los ee ete E EDEN irte PU EE DRE EIE Pet Enea orae ERG H 5 HLA PCM 31 n Ee Rut n E NAE SH REESE ARS H 5 535 TI DATI DAS ERE IRE RR RC DP REI NIRE US EAS qus H 5 TISESEZTEI BS ES iure ett eter er e i rer ERE a H
7. EF DATA BENI GE 4 505 ACCREDITED Comtech EF Data is an AS9100 Rev 1509001 2000 Registered Company P A DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual IMPORTANT NOTE The information contained in this document supersedes all previously published information regarding this product This manual is subject to change without prior notice Part Number MN DMD50 Revision 3 Errata Comtech EF Data Documentation Update Subject Original Manual Part Number Rev Errata Number PLM Document ID PLM CO Number Comments r DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual Part Number MN DMD50 Revision 2 October 22 2009 Revise Trademarks subsection in Preface to include CEFD Patents and Patents Pending note MN DMD50 Rev 2 ER DMD50 EA2 C 0022887 The updated information will be incorporated into the next formal revision of the manual Update the manual Preface Revise Trademarks section to read addition in bold Trademarks Product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged See all of Comtech EF Data s Patents and Patents Pending at http patents comtechefdata com ER DMD50 EA2 THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION UPDATE PLM CO C 0022887 Page 1 of 2 Errata A for MN DMD50O 2 Update Preface This page
8. setate setas eee ea aetates toas esas D 3 0 5 Change Access ete vna aloe eoe eus Sra r bn pe eeu e eae reor EE esee Te oai s sostas esso D 4 0 6 Modem Web sup usen Pet Ree ME pL D 4 D 7 Web Page Appearance eee eoe eren on ion ol tn vo ep ne SEEN oses seostes eT Econo Reano D 7 APPENDIX E SIHAP CODES nid eee ie e E 1 1 SORA CODES eS E 1 E Sample Applications eere er ret rra roe eee eeu nk uua ee vere vaa cossseescecestesedenes sdcessoessvssasvesscsossvondves 5 Operational Case Examples ccscssssssssssssssssssssssssscssscsssssssssscsssssssssssssssssssscsssscssessssssesssess E 6 E 3 1 Case 1 IDR 8 448 Mbps 3 4 Rate Viterbi E 6 E 32 Case 2 IBS 1 544 Mbps 3 4 Rate E 7 E 3 3 Case 3 Closed Network 3 4 Rate Viterbi IBS Overhead eese E 8 E 3 4 Case 4 Loop Imung Exar ple nee e Pe e ente etus E 9 APPENDIX F TCP IP ETHERNET SETUP ire tenen F 1 EE 11 ooo hd eret tuo F 1 F 2 TCP IP Network Configuration 4 eee ee ee eese eren ee eate seen aset ea sete eo s te ee e eaae seen s tese s epa seen ae F 1 Network Configuration Summary
9. hofte A 1 Hardware Options A 1 Ao G 703 IDR ESC Interface s eeeeeerororororeeseeececeroroceeeeeororororeeeeeeserorororereorororororeeeererererereseeeororere A 1 A 3 Internal High Stability csccicccoscococssccscsssnscocstsssessssvanseseosessccssnessedensosesscenasesdeasssecssnessessosoressocsnserses A 1 A4 DC Tnp t Prime POWer vevscscdssccsssssstesssensscovsseetecssanssosdesestessbonsvoonssnsbeesassevoasesesbescdoassonsdeesseessoneooes A 1 ASURS 422 Parallel esa Per Iber A 1 A6 ASULVDS Parallel A 1 LEE e A 1 AS Ethernet Data CURE Ra eno REPE UC Ha CRETA A 2 7 0 pce A 2 HSSI ETHERNET 2 A 11 Turbo Product Code Variable Reed Soloman eere eee eee estne enses tn sn neta tn anne A 2 A 12 Customized Options i sccsccvcaccesecsseesssssnccesacsssctsseseaceencesacdssesedesvonssucsccesescssesssescosesescsveussesecnssossesess A 2 APPENDIX B FRONT PANEL UPGRADE B 1 B1 Tr OGUCti B 1 B2 Required Equipment oett ee cerno he ka eroe eoo ae v nue Y r
10. 50 must be used at the end of the link where the cancellation needs to take place The transponder is operated as Loopback That is each end of the link must be able to see a copy of its own signal in the return downlink path from the satellite The looped back signal is then subtracted which leaves the signal from the distant end of the link DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier cannot be used in spot beam systems The transponder needs to be bent pipe meaning no on board processing demodulation regeneration can be employed Demodulation remodulation does not preserve the linear combination of the forward and return signals and the resulting reconstituted waveform prevents recovery of the original constituent signals Figure 3 1 shows a simplified conceptual block diagram of CnC processing The two ends of the link are denoted A and B and the uplink and downlink are shown This performance is achieved through advanced signal processing algorithms that provide superior cancellation while tracking and compensating for the following common link impairments 1 2 Time varying delay In addition to the static delays of the electronics and the round trip delay associated with propagation to the satellite and back there is a time varying component due to movement of the satellite The CnC module tracks and compensates for this variation Frequency offset and drift Common sources are satellite Doppler shift up and down
11. 3 37 3 14 13 Carrier in Carrier Link Budget Calculation eene 3 37 3 14 14 Estimating PSD Ratioa rete EA heresi ee de Hope eee eee Rea 3 38 3 14 14 1 Estimating PSD Ratio from 15 3 38 3 14 14 2 Estimating PSD Ratio from 3 39 3 14 14 3 Estimating PSD Ratio Using Spectrum Analyzer eere 3 39 3 14 15 DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier 3 40 3 14 16 Carrier in Carrier 3 40 3 14 17 MT M 3 41 3 15 Satellite Control Channel SCC 4 4 eere eee ee eee eene ee ee eee tese tesa se sese ette ee 3 43 3 15 1 SCC Frammng Structure cete ctore lere reet eek asec sleeve th eb leen eee dna 3 43 3 15 2 Aggregate Data Rates uice cine ide ete t e Heer E Eee gH 3 45 3153 Overhead Rate ComrparisSOn ire eh eere ette eter etg ettet eee cotes 3 45 3 15 4 Actual Overhead Rate Calculation sese entere 3 46 3155 SCC Overhead Channel Setup eer 3 47 3 16 EDMAC Satellite Framing Deframing Mod l cccccsssscssccssscsscscssscssssccssssssscsssceseseses 3 48 3 17 Locating the ID Code Operational Procedure eere eee esee eee eren eese eese toes 3 48 BAS
12. 1E 1 B O QPSK Uncoded Theory 1E 2 Viterbi Decoder 1E 3 Typical Performance 1E 4 X 1E5 tn 1E 6 Specification 1 2 Rate 1E 7 Specification 3 4 Rate 1E 8 Specification 7 8 Rate 1E 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Eb No in dB Figure 7 1 DMD50 B O QPSK BER Performance Viterbi Note Eb No values include the effect of using Differential Decoding and V 35 descrambling MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 10 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications 7 22 2 BER Performance Sequential 1E 1 B O QPSK Uncoded Theory 1E 2 Sequential Decoder Typical 1 3 Performance 1E 4 1E5 m 1E 6 Specification 1 2 Rate 1E 7 Specification 3 4 Rate 1E 8 Specification 7 8 Rate 1E 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Eb No in dB Figure 7 2 DMD50 B O QPSK BER Performance Sequential Note Eb No values include the effect of using Differential Decoding and V 35 descrambling MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 11 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications 7 22 3 BER Performance Viterbi with Reed Solomon 1E 1 B O QPSK Uncoded Theory 1E 2 Typical Viterbi Decoder Reed Performance Solomon 1E 3 1E 4 1 5 m 1E 6 Specification 1 2 Rate 1E 7 Specification 7 8 Rate Specification 3 4 Rate 1E 8 1E 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Eb No in dB Figure 7 3 DMD50 B O QPSK BER Performance Viterbi w RS Note Eb No values include the effect of using Differential Decoding MN DMD50 Re
13. 3 20 3 14 DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier Option soeseosossosesesocssesoossesoossessoesosssesoossesoossesoossossossossssso 3 21 3 14 1 What is DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier esses ener 3 21 3 14 2 Application Bequirenients nc ped e RR tee ER E et Re tt bee es 3 22 3 14 3 Operational Recommendations eese 3 24 3 14 4 System Functionality and Operational Considerations eee 3 25 3 145 DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier Cancellation Process esses 3 27 3 14 6 Margin Requirements idee egeo ink de ede ge etie aie ena p 3 29 3 14 7 Carneran Carrier Latency esee eo Sr eee leo ted ess 3 29 3 14 8 Carrier in Carrier and Adaptive Coding and Modulation sss 3 29 3 14 9 Carrier in Carrier Link Design eec eiit tede tente 3 29 3149 1 Rate ene petra 3 30 3 14 9 2 Asymmetric Data Rate Link 5 nett iet oet e t re E Ee pct de 3 33 3 14 9 3 Power Limited Links ete ete Ahead bete MS 3 34 3 14 10 Carrier in Carrier Commissioning and Deployment 3 35 3 14 11 Validating Carrier in Carrier 3 36 Table of Contents Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem MN DMD50 3 14 12 Operational References ior anie ne e regere nere Erb Ene
14. OUT OF BOUNDS and the change will not be allowed Therefore the data rate should be entered as the first step in configuring the modem for D amp I The Mod Data Rate should be set according to the number of timeslots to be dropped and the Demod Data Rate should be set according to the number of timeslots to be inserted The following table gives the allowable D amp I data rates based on the number of slots n to be dropped or inserted n 1 data rate 64000 n 2 data rate 128000 3 data rate 192000 n 4 data rate 256000 n 5 data rate 320000 n 6 data rate 384000 n 8 data rate 512000 n 10 data rate 640000 n 12 data rate 768000 n 15 data rate 960000 n 16 data rate 1024000 20 data rate 1280000 24 data rate 1536000 30 data rate 1920000 valid with E1 Interface only Operational Network Specification The Network Specification of the Modem often determines which additional menus and displays are available for use by the operator The D amp I Mode specific menus will not be displayed unless the Network Specification of the modem is set to D amp I Therefore the second step in configuring the modem should be to set the Network Specification to D amp I At this point the D amp I specific menus in the Interface section will become available and will remain available until the Network Specification of the modem is changed to something other than D amp I When
15. cssssccssssccssscssssscssssscsssccssssssssecsssssccsssssssssssssassseses 7 4 7 11 High Speed Serial Interface HSSD ccce e eee ecce ee eee eee ee eese sten s eee 7 4 PEDES IB Ec ME 7 4 7 13 DA UATPA Lec 7 4 7 14 Ethernet Data Interface Optional e cete cete etes ee eee eene en setas etas ta aetas etae taste testae a 7 4 7 15 Gigi Ethernet Data Interface Optional 4 c eee ecce scere eee ee eee eee nest ense eto sette sten aset eaae 7 4 TAG HSSE GT703 Ma ies ce etco be eo rho rus ego elo se eue ase Se eeu See url ase eU use eub ao Se eausa Pe eU 7 4 7 47 HSSI G703 T3 ES STS1 MAX iere eere een o creen epa nno enema et ra apo enn asa ue nea enn esee en o aou n 7 4 7 18 HSSHETHERNET ese 7 5 71 19 ENVirOnm ent als reote eee retro eroe er b VER 7 5 7 20 7 5 7 21 0 050 Data seve ai 7 6 721 I SNODnzDVB doe ned nte 7 6 TIEA DV Bannann cds 7 8 7 22 DMDSO0 BER Specifications 6 s cccsecssscsscesssccsecssscsesesoscscessssesssecsssosssosssoedsessecesensdanseses esstoassoes 7 10 7 22 1 BER Performance 7 10 7 22
16. Lease Information Rate 51 2 0 w kbits s Performance BER Alloc BW a 40 5373 MHz FEC Code Rate 6670 acc ai 3838 R S Code Rate n k N A Min Uplink Rain Margin 0 5 0000 kbits s Min Dnlink Degrad Margin Modulation Total Availability 99 970 Eb No Threshold C N Threshold E U L Carrier Center Freq 14242 00000 Transmit ES Code 1 s _Edites 1 Fact 100 Receive ES Code Eaites Link 1 1 2 User Specified Cancel LST Calculated Includes IF RF Margin and CnC Margin MultiCarrier Txpdr Lease Number of links Modulation Information Rate FEC Code Rate R S Code Rate Clear Sky Eb No Available Number of Assigned Carriers Transmit ES Code Transmit ES Size LST calculated Total BW allocated 10747 MHz MultiCarrier Tx pdr Lease Total BW PEB STI MHz Total EIRP utilized 186 dBW Total BW utilized pi 10747 MHz Total EIRP available 214 dBW Total BW available 441000 MHz Margin available utiliz ed 28 dB Margin available utiliz ed 0253 MHz CnC Allocated BW z 1 0747 22 0 53735 MHz CnC 0 5777 MHz CnC Leased BW 0 5777 MHz MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 31 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation The link budget summary for the different MODCOD combinations is as follows Allocated BW Leased BW Savings Compared PSD Ratio 8 QA
17. MN DMD50 Revision 3 E 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Strap Codes Dis Disable Strap Codes Strap Code Decimal Code Rate Data Rate Kbps Overhead eile A Framing Type Scrambler Type Drop and Insert Reed Solomon Modulation N 16 15 16 15 16 15 23 1024 27 1024 VIT IBS VIT IBS IBS IBS Dis Dis Dis 29 1536 IBS Dis 30 1088 N 39 43 46 51 53 54 57 58 67 71 75 77 78 83 85 MN DMD50 Revision 3 IBS VIT IBS IBS VIT IBS IBS VIT IBS IBS VIT IBS IBS VIT IBS IBS VIT IBS IBS VIT IBS IBS VIT IBS IBS VIT IBS IBS VIT IBS IBS VIT IBS IBS VIT IBS IBS Dis Dis Dis Dis Dis Dis n Q 2 4 1 1 1010120 101 Q Z Q Z 4 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Strap Codes Strap Codes Dis Disable Strap Code Decimal Code Rate Framing Type Data Rate Kbps Overhead Scrambler Type Drop and Insert Reed Solomon Modulation 86 1664 16 15 3 4 VIT 1728 16 15 VIT 1728 16 15 3 4 VIT 92 1792 16 15 1 2 VIT 99 1792 16 15 3 4 VIT 101 34 VIT 105 34 VIT 106 34 VIT 120 34 139 34 viT V 35 IESS V 35 IESS V 35 IESS V 35 IESS E 2 SampleApplications The following section prov
18. Carrier OFF Carrier ON Carrier AUTO Carrier VSAT Carrier RTS C 2 Carrier Off Modulator output is disabled C 3 Carrier On Modulator output is turned off before reprogramming modulator functions that may alter the output spectrum through the front panel and the user is required to enter Yes to re enable output after the change When using the terminal the modulator is turned off while re programming modulator functions that may alter the output spectrum and the user is required to manually turn on the output after the reprogramming MN DMD50 Revision 3 C 1 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Carrier Control C 4 C 5 C 6 Carrier Auto Modulator output is turned off before reprogramming modulator functions that may alter the output spectrum through the front panel but the output is automatically turned on after the change When using the terminal the modulator is turned off while re programming modulator functions that may alter the output spectrum and but the output is automatically turned on after the change Carrier VSat Modulator output is turned off before reprogramming modulator functions that may alter the output spectrum through the front panel and the user is required to enter Yes to re enable output after the change When using the terminal the modulator is turned off while re programming modulator functions that may alter the output spectrum and the user is required to manually t
19. N ROM Map Since the D amp I Functions are separate and distinct two separate maps must be configured at the start of the D amp I Multiplexer Operation These are the Tx transmit Active Map for Drop Mapping and the Rx receive Active Map for Insert Mapping The number of entries in each map is determined by the data rates selected Each map entry consists of an IBS Time Slot assignment and the Terrestrial 1 E1 Channel Number to which it is assigned Drop Mapping and Insert Mapping are completely separate and independent The map that is actually used for the Drop Function is the Tx Active Map the map that is actually used for the Insert function is the Rx Active Map Two additional maps exist the Tx Edit Map and the Rx Edit Map The Edit Maps are the buffer areas that are used when creating or modifying a map through the modem s LCD when editing is complete the appropriate map should be copied to the Active Map Any map may be copied to any other map with the exception of the ROM maps These maps may only be the source of the data used to create a User Edit or Active Map Maps can be created in the map editor and stored as User Maps New Active Maps can be downloaded during Modem Operation but this will result in a temporary disruption of service on the terrestrial line or the Satellite transmission The following p
20. There is a simple navigation scheme that consists of gel tabs centralized on the main page Hwew conric 0 50 Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Web Browser Setup Guide Notes MN DMD50 Revision 3 D 8 Appendix E Strap Codes E 1 Strap Codes The Strap Code is a quick set key that sets many of the modem parameters For quick setup of the modem Strap Codes are very helpful When a Strap Code is entered the modem is automatically configured for the code s corresponding data rate overhead code rate framing scrambler type and modulation An example of how to set a strap code follows Example At the Front Panel lt Modulator gt Menu depress then move to the Strap Code Submenu and enter 16 The modem will be automatically configured to the parameters shown below in the highlighted row Strap Code 16 Use the Strap Code Guide Table D 1 for available strap codes Table D 1 Strap Codes Strap Codes Dis Disable Strap Code Decimal Code Rate Data Rate Kbps Overhead Framing Type Scrambler Type Drop and Insert Reed Solomon Modulation 1 64 16 15 1 2 VIT 128 16 15 1 2 VIT 512 16 15 1 2 VIT 768 16 15 1 2 VIT 1536 16 15 VIT 1920 16 15 VIT MN DMD50 Revision 3 E 1 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Strap Codes Strap Codes
21. DIRECT CONNECTION X OVER CABLE The Computer TCP IP must be properly configured in order to obtain connectivity The following set up procedure can be used as a guide to aide in this setup The following instructions apply only to Windows 2000 or XP Classic 1 Click on the Start Button Select Settings and click on the Control Panel Icon Double click the Network Connections Icon 2 Select Local Area Connection icon for the applicable Ethernet adapter Usually it is the first Local Area Connection listed Double click the Local Area Connection Click on the Properties icon Local Area Connection Status Local Area Connection Status Box MN DMD50 Revision 3 4 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem TCP IP Ethernet Setup 3 Make sure that the box next to the Internet Protocol TCP IP is checked Highlight Interconnect Protocol TCP IP and click on the Properties button Local Area Connection Properties Gabe and Printer Sharing for Microsof Networks Ml QoS Packet Scheduler E AEGIS Protocol IEEE 802 1 v23 1 7 Local Area Connection Properties Box 4 Select Use the following IP Address Enter in the IP Address that is offset by 5 or so numbers from the equipment address the computer and the equipment that it is connecting to can not have identical addresses and Subnet Mask this is identical to the subnet mask programmed into the equipment into the corresponding fields Click the OK button
22. INV TERR amp BASE INV BASEBAND INV TERR DATA NONE Allows the user to invert the Rx Data polarity NONE SWAPPED Allows the user to swap the I amp Q Channels when using BPSK Modulation VOICE X2 DATA 64KBPS IDR ESC Channel used for Voice or 64 K data channel Only available when IDR Network is selected DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem REED SOLOMON menu ENABLE DISABLE RS RATE INTERLVR DEPTH CNC menu ENABLE DISABLE MIN SRCH DELAY MAX SRCH DELAY FREQ OFFST RNG User Interfaces These selections are visible only when the Reed Solomon Option is installed ENABLED DISABLED Allows the user to Enable Disable the Reed Solomon Encoder Refer to Table 3 1 for standard n k values Displays the currently used n k Reed Solomon Codes In Closed Net Mode and using the appropriate hardware the user may select custom R S Codes 4 8 12 Allows the user to select the Reed Solomon interleaver depth These selections are visible only when the Carrier in Carrier card is installed ENABLED DISABLED Allows the user to Enable Disable the Carrier in Carrier Minimum Search Delay ms 0 to Max Maximum Search Delay ms Min to 330ms Range of Frequency Offset KHz between the Interferer and the desired received signal 1Khz to 32Khz 4 4 4 Interface Menu Options and Parameters TX SETUP menu CIRCUIT ID TERR INTERFACE Allows the user entry of a Tx Circuit Identifi
23. PROPER GROUNDING PROTECTION IS REQUIRED REFER TO THE A GROUNDING CAUTION NOTE PROVIDED ON THE PREVIOUS PAGE The DMD50 is designed for connection to a power system that has separate ground line and neutral conductors The equipment is not designed for connection to a power system that has no direct connection to ground The installation and connection to the line supply must be made in compliance to local or national wiring codes and regulations The 50 is shipped with a line inlet cable suitable for use in the country of operation If it is necessary to replace this cable ensure the replacement has an equivalent specification Examples of acceptable ratings for the cable include HAR BASEC and HOXXX X Examples of acceptable connector ratings include VDE NF USE UL CSA OVE CEBEC NEMKO DEMKO BS1636A BSI SETI IMQ KEMA KEUR and SEV International Symbols Symbol Definition Symbol Definition Alternating Current Protective Earth Fuse b Chassis Ground Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive In accordance with the Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 91 263 this equipment should not be directly connected to the Public Telecommunications Network CE Mark Comtech EF Data declares that the DMD50 modem meets the necessary requirements for the CE Mark DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Revision 3 Preface MN DMD50 RoHS Compliancy This unit
24. S Signal Name Description Direction L1 26 Signal Grom 4 39RD Receive Data Output 6 st Send Timing SCD Oupu 3 3 Signal Ground 33 TA DTE Available Input Terminal Timing 34 TT SCTE Input 13 38 SG Signal Ground 14 18 39 43 5 Ancillary to DCE Reserved Input 19 44 SG Signal Ground 4 Ancillary from 20 23 45 48 DCE Reserved Output 24 49 Test Mode Output MN DMD50 Revision 3 5 22 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces 5 17 5 18 Ethernet Data Interface The DMD50 Ethernet Data Interface provides four RJ 45 Auto Crossover and Auto Sensing 10 100 Ethernet Data Ports JS1 through JS4 may be referred to Port 1 through Port 4 respectively Refer to Figure 5 1 for rear panel configurations JS1 is Port 1 JS2 is Port 2 e JS3 is Port 3 e JS4 is Port 4 Refer to Figure 5 1 for outline and Appendix I for setup amp configuration GigE Interface The optional Ethernet Data Interface provides a three port RJ45 10 100 1000 Base T Interface The Ethernet interface supports Auto Crossover and Auto Sensing The Ethernet port are referred to as JS1 through JS4 or JS1 through JS3 Refer to Figures 5 1 for rear panel configurations JS1 is Port 1 JS2 is Port 2 JS3 is Port 3 Refer to Figure 5 1 for outline MN DMD50 Revision 3 5 23 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces Notes
25. ASI ASI Serial 75 Ohm BNC Female RS 422 Parallel DVB M2P Parallel RS 422 DB 25 Female ASI ASI Serial 75 Ohm BNC Female LVDS Parallel DVB M2P Parallel LVDS DB 25 Female DVB M2P DVB M2P DB 25 Female Connector It complies with RS 422 Electrical Specifications Ethernet Data Interface Optional Ethernet Data Interface Four RJ 45 Auto Crossover Auto Sensing 10 100 Ethernet Data Ports Complies with IEEE 802 3 and IEEE 802 3u Gigi Ethernet Data Interface Optional Ethernet Data Interface Three RJ 45 Auto Crossover Auto Sensing 10 100 1000 Ethernet Data Ports Complies with IEEE 802 3 and IEEE 802 3u HSSI G703 T2 E2 Max HSSI High Speed Serial Interface 50 pin SCSI 2 Type Connector Female G 703 T1 DSX1 1 544 Mbps 100 Ohm Balanced AMI and B8ZS G 703 E1 2 048 Mbps 75 Ohm Unbalanced and 120 Ohm Balanced HDB3 G 703 T2 DSX2 6 312 Mbps 75 Ohm Unbalanced and 110 Ohm Balanced B8ZS and B6ZS G 703 E2 8 448 Mbps 75 Ohm BNC Unbalanced HDB3 Note Does not support backward alarms HSSI G703 T3 E3 STS1 Max HSSI High Speed Serial Interface 50 pin SCSI 2 Type Connector Female G 703 T1 DSX1 1 544 Mbps 100 Ohm Balanced AMI and B8ZS G 703 E1 2 048 Mbps 75 Ohm Unbalanced and 120 Ohm Balanced HDB3 G 703 T2 DSX2 6 312 Mbps 75 Ohm Unbalanced and 110 Ohm Balanced B8ZS and B6ZS MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 4 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem 7 18 7 19 7 20 G 703 E2 G 703
26. Signal Name Ground GND Directio Backward Alarm Out INO ESCBWO INO No Connection NC Backward Alarm Out 2 NO ESCBWO 2NO No Connection NC Backward Alarm Out 3 NO ESCBWO 3NO Ground GND Backward Alarm Out 4 NO ESCBWO 4NO No Connection NC Backward Alarm In 2 ESCBWI 2 Backward Alarm In 4 ESCBWI 4 No Connection NC No Connection NC Backward Alarm Out 1 C ESCBWO 1C Backward Alarm Out 1 NC ESCBWO Backward Alarm Out 2 ESCBWO 2C Backward Alarm Out 2 NC ESCBWO 2NC Backward Alarm Out 3 C ESCBWO 3C Backward Alarm Out 3 NC ESCBWO 3NC Backward Alarm Out 4 ESCBWO 4C Backward Alarm Out 4 NC ESCBWO 4NC Backward Alarm In 1 ESCBWI 1 Backward Alarm In 3 ESCBWI 3 No Connection NC MN DMD50 Revision 3 No Connection NC 5 8 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces 5 7 64K AUDIO J2 The 64K AUDIO Port allows for communications between Earth Stations It is a 9 Pin Female D Connector that complies with IESS 308 Refer to Table 5 7 for pinouts in audio mode and Table 5 8 for pinouts in 64k mode Table 5 7 64K AUDIO In Audio Mode Port 9 Pin Female D Connector J2 Signal Name Signal Direction Transmit Audio 1A ESCAUDTX 1A Receive Audio 1A ESCAUDRX 1A Groun
27. The modem supports three versions of AUPC They include Radyne AUPC EF AUPC and Near Side AUPC Radyne AUPC and EF AUPC use satellite overhead to send messages between the local and remote ends of an SCPC link The messaging is done with IBS 1 15 and EF AUPC Framing messages Radyne AUPC In this case Target E N indicates the remote value the local unit wants to maintain by adjusting the local power level Radyne AUPC can be set to operate on either or both directions of a link but always require a bi directional channel Enabling AUPC on one side of the link will activate AUPC on the distant end of the link It is necessary that both the Modulator and Demodulator be set to the appropriate framing for AUPC options to be editable and for the AUPC function to operate properly Examples of the basic Radyne AUPC Operations are described as follows Assume that the two modems one at each end of the link are set to Radyne AUPC operation Only one direction is discussed but the same functions could be occurring in both directions simultaneously Local Modem is transmitting to Remote modem under normal conditions and the Remote modem has a receive E N of 7 5 dB Local modem has been set to a Target E N of 7 5 dB with an output power level of 15 dBm It begins raining at Remote site and E N drops to 7 0 then 6 8 dB Remote Modem is constantly sending update messages of its E N to Local modem When Local modem sees MN
28. 7 8 Rate BPSK QPSK Uncoded 1 2 Rate QPSK 3 4 Rate QPSK 7 8 Rate QPSK 2 3 Rate 8PSK 3 4 Rate 8PSK 7 8 Rate 8PSK 2 3 Rate SQAM 3 4 Rate SQAM 7 8 Rate SQAM 3 4 Rate 160AM 7 8 Rate 160AM Modulator Modulation IF Tuning Range L Band Tuning Range Impedance Connector Return Loss Output Power Output Stability Output Spectrum Spurious On Off Power Ratio Scrambler FEC MN DMD50 Revision 3 Technical Specifications 4 8 Kbps to 10 0 Mbps 2 4 Kbps to 10 0 Mbps 3 6 Kbps to 10 0 Mbps 4 2 Kbps to 10 0 Mbps 9 6 Kbps to 20 0 Mbps 4 8 Kbps to 20 0 Mbps 7 2 Kbps to 20 0 Mbps 8 4 Kbps to 20 0 Mbps 9 6 Kbps to 52 0 Mbps 10 8 Kbps to 20 0 Mbps 12 6 Kbps to 20 0 Mbps 36 0 Kbps to 20 0 Mbps 40 5 Kbps to 20 0 Mbps 48 0 Kbps to 20 0 Mbps 14 4 Kbps to 52 0 Mbps 16 84 Kbps to 52 0 Mbps BPSK QPSK OQPSK 8PSK 8QAM 16QAM 50 to 90 100 to 180 MHz in 1 Hz Steps 950 to 2050 MHz in 1 Hz Steps IF 75 Ohm 50 Ohm Optional L Band 50 Ohm BNC 75 Ohm SMA 50 Ohm L Band IF 1 5 1 L Band 2 0 1 0 to 25 dB IF 0 5 dB Over Frequency and Temperature L Band 1 0 dB Over Frequency and Temperature Meets IESS 308 309 310 Power Spectral Mask 55 dBc In Band 50 to 90 MHz 100 to 180 MHz 950 to 2050 MHz 45 dBc Out of Band gt 60 dB OM 73 CCITT V 35 or IBS Viterbi K 7 at 1 2 3 4 and 7 8 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem 7 3 Outer Encoder Options Data Clock Source Internal Stability Demodulator
29. CAUTION may also be used to indicate other unsafe CAUTION practices or risks of property damage IMPORTANT or NOTE indicates information critical for proper equipment function o gt gt IMPORTANT Recommended Standard Designations Recommended Standard RS Designations have been superseded by the new designation of the Electronic Industries Association EIA References to the old designations are shown only when depicting actual text displayed on the screen of the unit RS 232 RS 485 etc All other references in the manual will be shown with the EIA designations The user should carefully review the following information IMPORTANT DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Revision 3 Preface MN DMD50 Electrical Safety The DMD50 has been shown to comply with the EN 60950 1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment including electrical business machines safety standard The equipment is rated for a nominal operating range of 100 240 volts AC or an appropriately equipped DC option nominal operating range is 48 5 volts DC The unit has a maximum power consumption of 250 watts Battery The modem contains a Lithium Battery DANGER OF EXPLOSION EXISTS if the A battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type WARNING recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries in accordance with local and national regulations Grounding PROPER GROUNDING PROTECTION REQUIRED The installatio
30. Dis Disable Strap Code Decimal Code Rate Data Rate Kbps Overhead Framing Type Scrambler Type Drop and Insert Reed Solomon Modulation Ls oe ms pu pwr ms o9 om eee pvep pe 2048 V 35 IESS mE V 35 IESS 33 3 4 V 35 IESS 48 ON CA 256 1 2 vir Dis Dis 320 3 4 vir NONE 384 1 2 vir NONE 96 384 1 3 4 V 35 IESS 129 1 2 I V 35 IESS 132 768 1 2 NONE 11 V 35 IESS EIE a 1 Az K 13 35 1 55 14 1536 3 4 35 1 55 9 1 2 35 1 55 3 4 35 1 55 MN DMD50 Revision 3 E 2 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Strap Codes Strap Codes Dis Disable Strap Code Decimal Code Rate Data Rate Kbps Overhead Framing Type Scrambler Type Drop and Insert Reed Solomon Modulation V 35 IESS V 35 IESS V 35 IESS V 35 IESS V 35 IESS NONE V 35 IESS NONE V 35 IESS NONE V 35 IESS NONE V 35 IESS NONE V 35 IESS NONE V 35 IESS V 35 IESS of pase 3 1 3264 EEE M J z V 35 1 55 3 QPSK QPSK CNT QPSK CNT N QPSK 3 4 QPSK 133 3 4 QPSK QPSK 3 4 QPSK 3 QPSK QPSK
31. JS2 1s Port 2 JS3 is Port 3 154 1s Port 4 Refer to Figure 5 1 for outline drawings and Appendix E for setup and configuration 5 15 HSSI G 703 The HSSI High Speed Serial Interface J1 complies with the HSSI Functional and Electrical Specifications The physical interface is a 50 Pin SCSI 2 Type Connector Electrical levels are ECL Gapped clocking not supported The pinouts for this interface are listed in Table 5 17 Table 5 17 J1 HSSI High Speed Serial Interface 50 Pin Connector en ix Signal Name Description Direction Pi 26 4 9 Rb Receive Data Output 6 Sena Timing SCT 3 3 Ground 33 TA DTE Available Input Terminal Timing 34 TT SCTE Input 13 38 SG Signal Ground 14 18 39 43 5 Ancillary to DCE Reserved Input 19 44 SG Signal Ground 4 Ancillary from 20 23 45 48 DCE Reserved Output 24 49 FLT DMD_FLT MN DMD50 Revision 3 5 18 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem 5 15 1 64K AUDIO J2 User Interfaces The 64K AUDIO Port allows for communications between Earth Stations It is a 9 Pin Female D Connector that complies to IESS 308 Refer to Table 5 18 for pinouts in audio mode and Table 5 19 for pinouts in 64k mode Table 5 18 64K AUDIO In Audio Mode Port 9 Pin Female D Connector 12 Signal Name Transmit Audio 1A ESCAUDTX 1
32. Parameters set by strap code Data Rate Inner Code Rate Satellite Framing Scrambler Drop and Insert Outer Code Rate Reed Solomon Modulation Network Spec 50 90 MHz 100 180 MHz or 950 2050 MHz Allows the user to enter the Modulator IF Frequency in 1 Hz increments NORMAL INVERTED Allows the user to invert the direction of rotation for PSK Modulation Normal meets the IESS Specification QPSK BPSK OQPSK 8PSK 16QAM Allows the user to select the demodulation type Intelsat 0 35 DVB 0 35 DVB 0 25 DVB 0 20 Allows the user to set the spectral shape of Tx Data Filter 0 to 255 kHz Allows the user to set the acquisition range for the demodulator 0 0 6553 5 sec Allows the user to set the reacquisition delay time in 1 10 second increments 0 65535 Hz Allows the user to set the reacquisition sweep in 1 Hz increments Normal Supressed Allows the user to indicate adjacent carrier as Normal or Supressed High Power Unit will increase or decrease post decimination gain appropriately DISABLED ENABLED Allows the user to disable or enable the Rx fast acquisition capability 4 13 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces Limitations of Fast Acquistion The maximum symbol rate for Fast Acquistion is 1028Ksps Fast Acquistion must be disable for rates greater than 1028Ksps Only supports QPSK and 8PSK in a NON DVB MODE Does not support spectral inversion
33. Symptom Possible Cause The Modem will not acquire the incoming There is an improper receive input to modem The Receive Carrier Level is too low The Receive Carrier Frequency is outside of the carrier acquisition range The Transmit Carrier is incompatible Modem is in Test Mode The Async Port is not configured correctly The switches may not be set in the correct positions 6 2 1 Alarm Faults 6 2 1 1 Major Tx Alarms Alarm Possible Cause FPGA CFG Indicates a transmit FPGA hardware failure DSP CFG Indicates a transmit FPGA failure SCT Clock PLL Indicates that the Tx SCT Clock PLL is not locked This alarm will flash on during certain modem parameter changes A solid indication points toward a configuration problem within the modem SYM Clock PLL Indicates that the Tx Symbol Clock PLL is not locked This alarm will flash on during certain modem parameter changes A solid indication points toward a problem with the incoming clock to the modem SCTE LB Synth PLL Indicates that the Tx L Band Synthesizer is not locked This alarm will flash on during certain modem parameter changes A solid indication points toward a configuration problem within the modem IF Synth PLL Indicates that the Tx IF Synthesizer is not locked This alarm will flash on during certain modem parameter changes A solid indication points toward a configuration problem within the modem
34. the synchronizing overhead cannot be easily calculated However dividing the In Band Rate by the Control Ratio can approximate it The following equation shows the basic calculation of this rate Aggregate Date Rate User Data Rate In Band Rate In Band Rate Control Ratio User Data In Band Synchronizing Rate Rate Overhead HOA _ Aggregate Data Rate 2 As an example given the following parameters User Data Rate 1 024 000 bps In Band Rate 19 200 bps Control Ratio 117 Aggregate data rate 1 024 000 19 200 19 200 7 approximately 1 045 942 actually 1045974 This gives an overhead ratio of 1 045 974 1 024 000 1 021 In addition another constraint changes the actual Aggregate Data Rate The user data slot size is limited to 2 500 bits Because of this the modem increases the in band rate to reduce the user data slot size This only happens at higher user data rates 3 15 3 Overhead Rate Comparison The SCC Overhead Ratio varies depending on the User Data Rate the In Band Rate and the Control Ratio This gives SCC the advantage of lower overhead rates when compared to IBS which has a fixed overhead ratio of 16 15 or 1 067 Table 3 4 shows example overhead rates for different user data and control ratios Table 3 5 Overhead Rates Examples User Data Control Aggregate Data Overhead Rate Ratio Rate Ratio 512 000 19 200 1 7 533 974 1 043 1 024 000 19 200 1 7 1 045 974 1 021 2 048 000 19
35. 2 Performance 7 11 7 22 3 Performance Viterbi with 7 12 7 224 Performance 7 13 7 22 5 Performance 8PSK 7 14 7 22 6 Performance 8PSK 7 15 7 22 7 BER Performance 16QAM 7 16 7 22 8 Performance 16QAM Viterbi with 7 17 7 22 9 Performance 16QAM 7 18 7 22 10 BER Performance O QPSK 7 19 viii Table of Contents Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem MN DMD50 7 22 11 BER Performance SPSK 7 20 7 22 12 BER Performance 16QAM Turbo 7 21 7 22 13 1 2 Rate B O QPSK BER Performance 7 22 7 22 14 2 3 Rate Q 8PSK 8QAM BER Performance 7 23 7 22 15 3 4 Rate Q 8PSK 8 16QAM BER Performance 7 24 7 22 16 ACG Output eee BR e de cen nied E 7 30 APPENDIX A PRODUCT cnet iden eec diseno he
36. 2 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Web Browser Setup Guide 1 D 3 D 4 CONFIRMATION When ENABLED a change in the Web Interface will prompt a secondary window to be displayed asking Do you want to proceed This will allow the user to either OK the change or cancel the change When this feature is DISABLED the command will be executed upon entering the command or parameter change Commands pertaining to frequency and data rates cannot be overridden The Confirmation command is located under PASSWORD SETUP PREFERENCES USER 1 This will allow the operator to change the user name assign the Access group authorized password for USER 1 Upon entering the following fields will be displayed a ACCESS GROUP This will allow the assignment of No Group ADMIN OPER or GUEST to USER 1 AUTH PASSWORD This will allow for the entry of the password for USER 1 c USER RESET Using this command will allow the factory defaults as listed in the table above to be restored to USER 1 This can be used in the event that USER 1 is locked out due to password restriction USER 2 This has the same menu structure as USER 1 USER 3 This has the same menu structure as USER 1 Radyne s Web configuration allows for the support of 3 user profiles These are configured through the PASSWORD SETUP ACCESS section in the Web Browser Change Web User Name Any of the three available user names can be modified 1 Goto USER
37. 2 3 Q 8PSK 8QAM BER Performance LDPC MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 24 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications Table 7 1 B O QPSK BER Performance Viterbi BER 7 9 dB 8 6 dB 9 4 dB 10 0 dB 11 7 dB 10 5 dB Table 7 2 B O QPSK BER Performance Sequential Table 7 3 B O QPSK BER Performance Viterbi w RS 1E 3 33dB 5 1dB 43dB 5 3dB 1 4 35dB 53dB 32dB 45dB 5 7dB MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 25 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications 2 7 dB 3 7 dB 2 3 dB 3 2 dB Table 7 5 8PSK BER Performance Trellis BN TE Table 7 6 8PSK BER Performance Turbo Es _ 7dB 42dB 54dB tE4 73B 43dB 56dB 1E5 77dB 45dB 590B CAES 2s 46dB 62dB 1E7 84dB 47dB 64dB 3EB 87 B do dB 67dB iE9 9108 5 7dB Lieto 95dB 5208 73dB MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 26 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications Table 7 7 16QAM BER Performance Viterbi BER Table 7 9 160 BER Performance Turbo ES _ 56B 7dB LUE rp ee dB dE o eed f 27888 1 o 7B 82 __ S 75B Mes jo ce p lt ii dB ieo 94dB ESTENT MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 27 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications Table 7 10 O QPSK BER Performance Tur
38. 20000000 20000000 20000000 MN DMD50 Revision 3 20000000 LDPC TPC Card LDPC TPC Card LDPC TPC Card DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem 188 Mode Technical Specifications Modulation Code Rate VIT 1 2 Min Data Rate Max Data Rate 4607843 VIT 2 3 6143790 VIT 3 4 6911764 VIT 5 6 7079738 VIT 7 8 VIT 1 2 8063725 9215686 VIT 2 3 12287581 VIT 3 4 13823529 VIT 5 6 15359476 VIT 7 8 16127450 18431372 20000000 20000000 20000000 204 Mode 20000000 Modulation Code Rate VIT 1 2 Min Data Rate Max Data Rate 5000000 VIT 2 3 6666666 VIT 3 4 7500000 VIT 5 6 8333333 VIT 7 8 VIT 1 2 8750000 10000000 VIT 2 3 13333333 VIT 3 4 15000000 VIT 5 6 16666666 VIT 7 8 17500000 20000000 20000000 20000000 20000000 MN DMD50 Revision 3 20000000 7 9 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications 7 22 DMD50 BER Specifications 7 22 1 BER Performance Viterbi
39. 4 5 Terminal Mode Controls issccssiccscesscntsiveteossiscscecsussescnsviscasansisbosssdasscgussassenssicssseatsescaussesusuevsasoees 4 42 4 5 1 Modem Terminal Mode Control eese eene nennen nennen 4 43 4 5 2 Modem Setup for Terminal Mode 4 43 4 6 Terminal Port User Interlacesicccsscccscivstscssiscsceussasescgstiscosaudisseossvssscgussassvekssbsesseetvascaus evusuensasescs 4 43 4 7 4 44 Table of Contents Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem MN DMD50 4 8 Terminal S reens s seeseccsesssvececsaseccessesvecesssseccseseenccecdsseccsoseawecesusseccsossbueceesgesccsebesecssbsseecsosbuecseste 4 45 4 9 RS485 Remote Port Interface RLLP Protocol 4 4 eee eee ee eren nenne nane s esee to 4 45 4 9 1 Protocol Structure SER Ha e te eke tee it idees 4 45 4 10 Ethernet Remote Port Interface SNMP amp Web Browser eene eene eene 4 46 CHAPTER 5 REAR PANEL INTERFACES 5 1 5 1 C nn ctlons ed ves eue ue en ere Loan er e ue ee See UR REDE EN VE S Le VE SEGUE 5 1 5 2 Compact BlASW 5 2 53 PowerInput Modul s e oreet eerte eis ee poseer eR ee e Y 5 3 5 3 1 Power Input Module tre th pd ee iet etti geh sehen Pee ERE ee epe do
40. 4 Rate VIT Under Demodulator Set Network Spec Drop amp Insert Under Demodulator Under Demod IF Set Frequency to desired value MN DMD50 Revision 3 H 12 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Figures H 7 through H 10 illustrate D amp I Clock Setup Options Tx Trunk SD DDI Modulator TX CLK SCTE DDO Rx Trunk BUF CLK IDI emodulator M RD IDO FRAME EXTERNAL Figure H 7 Transmit Trunk and Receive Trunk SD DDI Modulator TX CLK SCTE DDO IDI BUF CLK IDI Demodulator Figure 8 Single Trunk Modulator DON T CARE IDI BUF CLK IDI Demodulator 2 Tp Figure H 9 Rx Only With Trunk MN DMD50 Revision 3 Drop and Insert D amp I 50 Universal Satellite Modem Drop and Insert D amp I Modulator DON T CARE IDI BUF CLK RX SAT OR Demodulator SCTE IF TX SIDE IS USED RD IDO FRAME INTERNAL Rx Only No Trunk Figure H 10 Rx Only No Trunk MN DMD50 Revision 3 H 14 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Drop and Insert D amp I H 3 D amp I Maps and Map Editing The Drop and Insert multiplexer is programmed by loading it with a transmit and receive map Maps always contain 30 entries although only first entries are relevant see Table 4 5 The modem includes provisions to copy change and store the D amp I transmit and receive maps directly from the Front Panel or via the remote M amp C link These
41. 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 Allows the user to enter the Remote Port Baud Rate INTERFACE RS 232 RS 485 Allows the user to enter the Remote Port interface type TCP IP menu BOOT MODE DEFAULT NON VOL BOOTP IP TEST MN DMD50 Revision 3 DEFAULT During initialization boot up the modem will restore the web setting to the standard IP Mask and addresses supplied by the modem The modem will be taken off the network and will not be accessible The Default settings are IP Address Mask 255 000 000 000 FF 00 00 00 hex Modem IP Address 010 000 000 001 0 8 00 hex Server IP Address 010 001 001 001 0A 01 01 01 hex Router IP Address 010 000 001 001 0A 00 01 01 hex BOOTP During initialization boot up the modem will get the names masks and IP Addresses of the modem router and server NON VOL Stores and uses IP Mask and addresses as provided by the user DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces IP TEST Stores and uses IP Mask and addresses to fixed settings as listed below Bootp Server Tag 206 IP Address Mask 255 255 255 000 FF FF FF 00 hex Modem IP Address 192 168 0 238 0 8 00 Server IP Address 192 168 000 101 0 8 00 65 Router IP Address 192 168 000 102 0 8 00 66 BOOTp SERVER 128 257 default is 206 Only used if Bootp is selected in Boot Mode Should be consistent with the tag expected by the users Bootp Server MODEM HOST The Host Modem for the
42. 5 H 1 4 Multidestinational Systems sioner uei eet etel SR e Soeur ee Lee rhe eee tied TOU H 5 H 1 5 Drop and Insert Mapping erit p te ere ec ette Ier dese H 6 H 2 Configuring the Modem for Drop and Insert eee eee ee ee ee ee eee eene eee ense tete seta aee eaas H 8 H 2 1 Data HUE H 8 H 2 2 Operational Network Specification rennen nennen nennen H 9 2 3 Terrestrial Framing Drop Mode Insert H 10 H 2 3 1 Insert Terrestrial Frame H 10 H 2 4 D amp I Sample Configurations and D amp I Clock Setup Options eese H 11 H 3 D amp I Maps and Map Editing eee ee esee ee esee eren eee sette sete stans eee sete se setas essen aea H 15 APPENDIX EFFCIENT DROP AND INSERT D8 eee I 1 11 CLIO Pac 1 1 1 2 QUISIEE trea eese erue ep ee epus eene gare uei ete eee I 1 1 3 Efficient Drop amp Insert ssscessisssicsessssssecssestsessosseonssssstssessvssonsssout sssenssonsessceesdsassvonssssbeesse 1 2 131 Calculating the Required Satellite Bandwidth I 3 L3 2 Calculating the Basic Efficient D amp I I 3 1 3 3 Calculating the Efficient D amp I Rate with E1 Signaling eee I 3 L3 4 Calculating the Efficient D amp I Rate with Enhanced Asynchronous Overhe
43. 6 75 VOC Optional DC Power eg 8 EIA ng ng ee EK OGD USA ASYNC TERMINAL 08 530 ROO gp S High Speed Serial Interfoce H Dam ov ENF N 6 6 AS OVE M2P Opt Interfe ry iptional Interfaces ETHERNET 10 100 DATA INTERFACE I HSSI G703 Interfoce 1 JS1 453 Gi Interfoce Figure 5 1 Universal Satellite Modem Rear Panel Configurations 5 0 Compact Flash The compact flash slot is located on the right side as viewed from the rear of the unit A 128 Mbit flash memory card stores all the modem M amp C and operational data It must be present when the modem is operating MN DMD50 Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces 5 3 Power Input Modules 5 3 1 AC Power Input Module AC Input Module Figure 5 1 is located on the left side of the unit Power applied to the port with the supplied power cable is 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Integrated into the Power Input Module is the Power On Off Rocker Switch Power consumption for the unit is 1A A chassis ground connection 10 32 threaded stud is located to the lower right of the module 5 3 2 DC Power Input Switch The Optional DC Power Input and Switch Figure 5 1 is available for all DMD50 products The unit may be powered from a 48v 5vdc VDC source with
44. 9 G703 BAL J4 ESCTXO B The G 703 Interface Port Balanced is a 15 Pin Female D Connector Refer to Table 5 10 for pinouts Table 5 10 G 703 BAL Port 15 Pin Female D Connector 14 Signal Name Direction 1 Send Data SD A Input 2 Ground GND 3 Receive Data A RD A Output 4 Ground GND 5 Drop Data DDO B Output 6 Insert Data In EXC IDI B Input 7 External Clock A BAL EXC Input A 8 External Clock BAL EXC Input B 9 Send Data SD B Input MN DMD50 Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces 10 No Connection 11 Receive Data RD B Output 12 Drop Data Out DDO A Output 13 Insert Data In EXC IDI A Input 14 Mod Fault MOD FLT Open Collector Output 15 Demod Fault DMD FLT Open Collector Output 5 9 1 SWITCH INTERFACE J5 The Switch Interface Port is a 68 Pin High Density Female Connector Refer to Table 5 11 for pinouts Table 5 11 SWITCH INTERFACE Port 68 Pin High Density Female Connector J5 No IDR ESC Backward Alarm Out 1 Common IDR ESC Backward Alarm Out 1 Normally Open ESCBWO INO Synchronous Data Terminal Timing Input A SYNC TT A IDR ESC Backward Alarm Out 2 Normally ESCBWO No Direction G 703 Drop Data Out A Synchronous Data Receive DDO A RT A Output imi ee eee MN IDR ESC Backward Alarm Output 3 Com
45. Alarms Menu Options and Parameters LATCHED ALARMS TX MAJOR menu FPGA CFG DSP CFG SCT CLOCK PLL Pass Fail The following alarms are latched in order to catch intermittent failures MN DMD50 Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem SYM CLOCK PLL LB SYNTH PLL IF SYNTH PLL ETHERNET WAN TX MINOR menu TERR CLK ACT TERR DATA ACT TX TERR AIS DnI FRAME LOCK DnI M FRAME LOCK DROP CRC TX DVB FRM LOCK RX MAJOR menu FPGA CFG DSP CFG SIGNAL LOCK FRAME LOCK MULTIFRAME LOCK LB SYNTH PLL IF SYNTH PLL ETHERNET WAN RX MINOR menu BUFF UNDERFLOW BUFF NEAR EMPTY BUFF NEAR FULL BUFF OVERFLOW MN DMD50 Revision 3 User Interfaces DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces RX DATA ACTIVITY SAT AIS DnI FRAME LOCK DnI M FRAME LOCK INSERT CRC T1 E1 SIGNALING IFEC LOCK OFEC LOCK INTERLEAVER RS UNCORR WORD TPC IFEC LOCK EBNO RX LEVEL IBS BER RX DVB FRM LOCK COMMON menu TERR FPGA CFG CODEC FPGA CFG CODEC DEV CFG VOLTAGE menu 1 5V RX SUPPLY 1 5V TX SUPPLY 3 3V SUPPLY 5V SUPPLY 12V SUPPLY 12V SUPPLY MN DMD50 Revision 3 4 30 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem 20V SUPPLY EXT CLOCK ACT EXT REF ACT EXT REF LOCK CLEAR LATCHED ENTER BACKWARD ALARMS User Interfaces Allows the user to reset the latched alarms by pressing ENTER on the keypad The following IBS and IDR Backward alarms only apply if the IDR or IBS option
46. BAL 14 ESCTXO B The G 703 Interface Port Balanced is a 15 Pin Female D Connector Refer to Table 5 21 for pinouts Table 5 21 G 703 BAL Port 15 Pin Female D Connector J4 Signal Name Direction 1 Send Data SD A Input 2 Ground GND 3 Receive Data A RD A Output 4 Ground GND 5 Drop Data DDO B Output 6 Insert d EXC IDLB Input 7 External Clock A Input 8 External Clock B Aer Input 9 Send Data SD B Input 10 No Connection MN DMD50 Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces 11 Receive Data B RD B Output 12 Drop Data Out DDO A Output 13 Insert Data In EXC IDI A Input 14 Mod Fault MODFET OPen Collector Output 15 Demod Fault DM TREES eos Output 5 15 4 ESC ALARM J5 The ESC Engineering Service Circuits Alarms Port is a 25 Pin Female Connector Refer to Table 5 22 for pinouts Table 5 22 ESC ALARM Port 25 Pin Female D Connector J1 Signal Name Ground Directio GND Backward Alarm Out INO ESCBWO 1NO No Connection NC Backward Alarm Out 2 NO ESCBWO 2NO No Connection NC Backward Alarm Out 3 NO ESCBWO 3NO Ground GND IN A n A RL N je Backward Alarm Out 4 NO ESCBWO 4NO No Connection NC Backward Alarm In 2 E
47. Calculating and displaying measurements User monitor and control interface including front panel and remote Units configuration and feature set The M amp C System is based on a powerful microprocessor with a large amount of Flash memory several bus architectures are used to interconnect the M amp C to all components of the DMD50 Communication to the outside world is done via connections to the remote port terminal port Ethernet port and alarm ports The M amp C runs off of software programmed into its Flash memory the memory can be reprogrammed via the Ethernet port to facilitate changes in software Enhanced Interface Printed Circuit Card The normal terrestrial data for the Baseband Processing Card can be re routed to the enhanced interface card The enhanced interface card adds a variety of connections to the modem for additional applications Functional Block Diagram Figure 3 3 represents the Functional Blocks The modem is shown in a typical application with customer data Tx Rx RF equipment and an antenna MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 2 1 3 2 2 P N 36 IF Output Spread 50 90 MHz 100 180 MHz 950 2050 MHz 0 to 25 dBm IF Input Antenna 50 90 MHz 100 180 MHz 950 2050 MHz Universal Satellite Modem 1x105 Reference 1x107 Aux Interface s Sync Data Digital Baseband Universal Processor Modem A
48. Clock EXT BNC External Clock Source EXT IDI Drop and Insert The modem handles RX Buffer clock selections based on source priority levels The user assigns priorities to the clock sources based on source selections Source 1 has the highest priority and Source 5 being the last resort or lowest priority If a fallback clock is selected and activity is lost at the highest priority source the modem will fall back to the next highest priority clock with activity When activity resumes on a higher priority source the modem resumes using the higher priority source Clock Source Priority RX SAT 1 of 5 SCTE 2 of 5 SCT 3 of 5 EXC BNC 4 of 5 EXT IDI 5 of 5 Refer to Front panel setup menus or Web Browser manual MN DMDREMOTEOP 3 7 2 1 RX SAT Clock The RX Sat clock is recovered from the satellite that is received from the distant end If selected the Buffer Clock 1s lock to the RX sat clock 3 7 2 2 SCTE Serial Clock Transmit External When SCTE is selected as the Rx Buffer clock the modem receives the clock from the Transmit Terrestrial interface 3 7 2 3 SCT Serial Clock Transmit If SCT clock is selected as the RX Buffer clock source then it should be configured for internal SCT is sometimes referred to as Internal Timing or Send Timing ST 3 7 2 4 EXT CLK EXT BNC External Clock J16 The External Clock that can be selected as the RX Buffer clock source This is a 75ohm unbalanced BNC connector This clock source is also identified
49. Control M amp C Subsystem The modems M amp C system is connected to most of the circuitry on any board contained in the modem These connections provide status on the working condition of the circuitry as well as providing the data required for the various measurements the modem provides The M amp C processes this information and generates status indications as well as alarms when necessary Detailed status information is available via the modems various user interfaces including the remote and terminal ports An external summary fault is available on the RS422 Data interface The M amp C contains a high performance microprocessor and is responsible for overall command and control of modem functions The M amp C is constantly monitoring all subsystems of the modem by performing a periodic poll routine and configures the modem by responding to commands input to the system During each poll cycle the status of each of the subsystems is collected and reported to each of the external ports Performance statistics such as Eb No buffer fill etc are compiled If faults are detected the M amp C will take appropriate actions to minimize the effect of such faults on the system refer to the Fault Matrices in Chapter 6 The modem supports the following M amp C protocols Terminal Interface Section 3 2 1 Remote Port Interface Section 3 2 2 Ethernet M amp C Web Browser amp SNMP Section 3 2 3 Modem Status Alarms amp Contact Closur
50. DMD50 Revision 3 G 1 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Strap Codes G 1 2 G 1 3 drop in the remote E N it slowly begins to raise the output power and will continue to adjust if the remote E N continues to drop As the rain increases in intensity the remote E N decreases but Local modem continues to increase its power level to compensate When the rain diminishes Local modem will see the remote E N begin to increase Local modem will lower its power level The operation is therefore a feedback control loop with the added complication of a significant time delay EF AUPC In EF AUPC mode the Target E N indicates the local unit wants the remote unit to maintain a power level sufficient to provide the local EyN value EF AUPC can be set to operate on either or both directions of a link but always require a bi directional channel Enabling AUPC on one side of the link will activate AUPC on the distant end of the link It is necessary that both the Modulator and Demodulator be set to the appropriate framing for AUPC options to be editable and for the AUPC function to operate properly Examples of the basic EF AUPC Operations are described as follows Assume that the two modems one at each end of the link are set to AUPC operation Only one direction is discussed but the same functions could be occurring in both directions simultaneously The local modem is transmitting to modem at a remote locale under normal conditions
51. Decoder is not locked INTERLEAVER Indicates that the Reed Solomon Interleaver is not synchronized EBNO dB Indicates that the Eb No is outside of limits IBS BER Indicates that there are more than one in 1000 bits in error in IBS mode RX DVB FRAME LOCK Indicates that the Rx Satellite Data Stream Framing is not DVB 6 2 1 5 Drop and Insert Alarms Alarm Possible Cause The insert framer is not in sync Multiframe Lock CRC Lock An Insert CRC Fault occurred Valid in PCM 30 or PCM 30C Modes T1 Signaling An Insert T1 Yellow Fault occurred Valid in T1 ESF T1D4 or SCL 96 Modes E1 FAS E1 Frame Acquisition Sync An E1 FAS Fault occurred Valid in PCM 30 or PCM 30C PCM 31 or PCM 31C Modes E1 MFAS E1 Multi Frame Acquisition Sync 6 2 1 6 An El MFAS Fault occurred Valid in PCM 30 or PCM 30C PCM 31 or PCM 31C Modes Common Major Alarms Alarm Possible Cause TERR FPGA CFG Indicates an Interface Card FPGA configuration failure probably caused by a missing or wrong file CODEC FPGA CFG Indicates Turbo Codec Card FPGA configuration failure probably caused by a missing or wrong file 1 5 RX SUPPLY Displays the measured voltage of the 1 5 Volt Rx power bus located inside the modem 1 5V TX SUPPLY Displays the measured voltage of the 1 5 Volt Tx power bus located inside the modem 3 3V SUPPLY Displays the measu
52. E3 G 703 T3 G 703 STS1 HSSI ETHERNET HSSI Connector Female Ethernet Data Interface Environmental Prime Power Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Physical Size Weight MN DMD50 Revision 3 Technical Specifications 8 448 Mbps 75 Ohm BNC Unbalanced HDB3 34 368 Mbps 75 Ohm BNC Unbalanced 44 736 Mbps 75 Ohm BNC Unbalanced 51 84Mbps 75 Ohm BNC Unbalanced Note Does not support backward alarms HSSI High Speed Serial Interface 50 pin SCSI 2 Type Four RJ 45 Auto Crossover Auto Sensing 10 100 Ethernet Data Ports Complies with IEEE 802 3 and IEEE 802 3u 100 to 240 VAC 50 to 60 Hz 250 Watts Maximum 48 VDC Optional 10 to 60 C 95 Humidity Non Condensing 20 to 70 C 99 humidity Non Condensing 19 W x 19 25 Dx 1 75 H 48 26 x 48 89 x 4 45 cm 6 5 Pounds 3 0 Kg 7 5 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications 7 21 0 050 Data Rate Limits 7 21 1 Non DVB Modulation Code Rate Min Data Rate Max Data Rate NONE 10000000 VIT 1 2 10000000 VIT 3 4 10000000 VIT 7 8 10000000 SEQ 1 2 2048000 SEQ 3 4 2048000 SEQ 7 8 2048000 TPC 21 44 4772727 Supercard TPC 3 4 7500000 Supercard TPC 7 8 8750000 Supercard TPC 495 4950000 Supercard TPC 793 7930000 Supercard TPC 21 44 477000 LDPC TPC Card LDPC 1 2 6250000 LDPC TPC Card NONE 9600 20000000 VIT 1 2 4800 20000000 VIT 3 4 7200 20000000 VIT 7 8 8400 20000000 SEQ 1 2 4800 2048000 SEQ 3 4 7200 204
53. External reference port input is specified at 3Vpp to 5Vpp Sine or Square wave 3 8 3 8 1 RS530 422 V 35 Interface Standard Data must be clocked into the modem by either the SCTE or SCT Source If SCTE is selected as the Tx Clock Source then SCTE must be supplied to the modem on the EIA 530 port The output of the dejitter buffer will be clocked with this source SCT should be used if SCTE has excessive jitter G 703 Interface Optional If the G 703 Interface is selected then the Tx Clock Source will default to SCTE and the Clock Polarity will default to Auto Loop timing with a G 703 Interface or Asymmetrical Data Rates requires external equipment at the remote end that is capable of using the recovered RD Clock as source timing for SCTE SD The modem will not manipulate the clock frequency Therefore the transmit and receive clock rates must be equal in order for the modem to perform loop timing MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 14 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 8 2 3 8 3 3 9 HSSI Interface Optional If the HSSI Interface is selected then the Tx Clock Source will default to SCTE and the Clock Polarity will default to Auto Ethernet Data Interface Optional If the Ethernet Data Interface is selected then the Tx Clock Source will default to SCTE and the Clock Polarity will default to Normal If the Ethernet Data Interface is selected then the Buffer Clock will default to RxSat and t
54. Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates a transmit DSP configuration failure Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates that the Tx SCT Clock PLL is not locked This alarm will flash on during certain modem parameter changes A solid indication points toward a configuration failure within the modem Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates that the Tx Symbol Clock PLL is not locked This alarm will flash on during certain modem parameter changes A solid indication points toward a problem with the incoming clock to the modem SCTE Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates that the Tx L Band Synthesizer is not locked This alarm will flash on during certain modem parameter changes A solid indication points toward a configuration problem within the modem Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates that the Tx IF Synthesizer is not locked This alarm will flash on during certain modem parameter changes A solid indication points toward a configuration problem within the modem Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates that the interface card is faulted and will not pass data displays only when the Ethernet Card is installed and the Ethernet Interface is selected DISABLED ENABLED Allows user to disable or enable forcing of a Tx Summary Alarm DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces TERR CLK ACT Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates no Terrestrial Clock activity TERR DATA Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indic
55. Link PEBcarier 1 PEBcarier 2 e Leased BW Duplex Link Greater of BWhbpupiex Link Link 4 For an optimal link the Leased Bandwidth and the Power Equivalent Bandwidth should be equal nearly equal 5 Repeat the link budget process by selecting different Modulation and FEC until the BW and PEB is nearly balanced MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 37 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 14 14 Estimating PSD Ratio PSD can be estimated from a link budget using Downlink EIRP and Symbol Rate PSD Downlink EIRP 10 Log Symbol Rate PSD Ratio Example Carrier Downlink EIRP Symbol Rate Power Spectral Density AtoB 27 dBW 500 ksps 29 99 dBW Hz BtoA 24 dBW 375 ksps 31 74 dBW Hz PSD Ratio 29 99 31 74 1 75 dB PSD Ratio B 01 74 29 99 1 75 dB 3 14 14 1 Estimating PSD Ratio from LST Carrier Information Link1 XLink2 Carrier Type IPL IPL Performance Modulation 8 8 Eb No Threshold 5 6 C N Threshold 8 6 Center Frequency 6014 0 Information Rate IR 4096 0 i PSD Link 2 Overhead 0 i Data Rate IR OH 4096 0 i 15 8 10 Log 2 0479 FEC Code Rate e67 1000000 47 3 dBW Hz R S Code Rate N A Transmission Rate Bandwidths and Margins Filter Rolloff Factor PSD Ratio Allocated Bandwidth 4 0 dB Noise Bandwidth Number of Assigned Carriers Per Link T
56. Modulator Menu as shown in Section 4 2 The EF AUPC Menu displays when EFAUPC Framing is enabled in the Demod and Mod set up menus 3 Highlighted areas are activated when modem is set to EF AUPC MN DMD50 Revision 3 G 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Strap Codes Table G 2 Remote AUPC Functions Remote AUPC Functions EF AUPC Only Function AUPC Available Options Description AUPC MODE Disable EFDATA Enables Disables the AUPC to function remotely LOOPBACK Enabled Disabled Loop back test over satellite link TX 2047 TEST BER Enabled Disabled Initiates 2047 Test pattern BER Test RX 2047 BER Status Menu Identifies the BER status on the distant RX side AUPC DEF LVL ee Sets default output power to be used The Remote AUPC Menus are only supported by EFAUPC MN DMD50 Revision 3 G 4 H 1 Appendix H Drop and Insert D amp I Drop and Insert D amp I The Drop and Insert D amp I function provides an interface between a full or Trunk whose framing is specified in CCITT G 704 and a fractional Nx64 Kbps Satellite Channel The Drop and Insert functionality conforms to IBS small IDR and Radyne Proprietary Efficient D amp I Framing Structures For information pertaining to Radyne proprietary Efficient Drop and Insert function refer to Appendix I The Drop function allows the user to select the terrestrial T1 or E1 timeslots that are to be dropped off for transmission over the link in the specified satellit
57. Only visible when Ethernet is selected as the interface type Displays the satellite Packet Error Rate Only visible when Ethernet is selected as the interface type Allows the user to reset the Ethernet packet statistics by pressing Enter Only visible when Ethernet is selected as the interface type the following sub menus only display when Ethernet is selected as the interface type The status of the following ports may be one of the following Down Unresolved 10 Mbps Half 10 Mbps Full 100 Mbps Half 100 Mbps Full Unused JS1 STATUS JS2 STATUS MN DMD50 Revision 3 The link is down Unable to agree on connection speed Connected at 10 Base T Half Duplex Connected at 10 Base T Full Duplex Connected at 100 Base T Half Duplex Connected at 100 Base T Full Duplex The port is not available See the note above Displays the current status of the LAN Port See the note above Displays the current status of the LAN Port DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem JS3 STATUS JS4 STATUS WAN STATUS VOLTAGES menu 1 5V RX SUPPLY 1 5V TX SUPPLY 3 3V SUPPLY 5V SUPPLY 12V SUPPLY 20V SUPPLY 12V SUPPLY CnC menu CnC DELAY CnC FREQ OFFST CnC RATIO RX BUFFER LEVEL RX BUFFER RESET ENTER User Interfaces See the note above Displays the current status of the LAN Port See the note above Displays the current status of the LAN Port See the note abo
58. Priority insures that the higher priority traffic will always be transmitted before any lower priority traffic With this setting the lower priority traffic can starve SCTE SCT EXT CLK Allows the user to select the Transmit Clock Source AUTO NORMAL INVERTED Allows the user to select the Clock Polarity for the Tx Terrestrial Clock relative to the Tx Data Auto detects wrong polarity and automatically corrects If G 703 Interface is selected this selection cannot be changed SCT SCR Allows the user to select SCT Source SCT is the internally generated SCT clock SCR is the Rx Satellite clock SCR us used for loop timing Reference Section 3 13 Drop and Insert Mapping in this manual NONE T1 D4 T1 ESF PCM 30 PCM 30C PCM 31 PCM 31C T1 D4 S T1 ESF S Drop mode may only be changed from none when the drop and insert specification is in use SRC Map Dest Map 4 17 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem SAT CH TERRCH ESC CHAN 1 dB ESC CHAN 2 dB RX SETUP menu CIRCUIT ID TERR INTERFACE BUFF SIZE msec MN DMD50 Revision 3 User Interfaces Allows the user to copy drop and insert maps Tx Act map is the drop map currently being used by the modem Source and destination may be any of the following TX ACT RX ACT TX EDIT RX EDIT USER 1 USER 8 ROM 1 ROM 8 1 31 1 31 The up down arrow keys allow you to traverse the sat terr pairings The slot numbers may be edit
59. RI EUG 3 14 3 73 EXT REF External Reference Top BNC Port J10 essere 3 14 3 8 RS530 422 V 35 Interface Standard ee eee eee ee eee ee ense se sese 3 14 3 8 1 G 703 Interface Optional 14 4 epit t rnb ene EL RH GRE 3 14 3 8 2 HSSI Interface Optuonal 52 2 23 Ite Hetero neto ette ptas derepente nda 3 15 3 8 3 Ethernet Data Interface 3 15 3 9 Reed Solomon Codec eee e e e eee esses esee ossis stessa se tastes sone tastes sens ense tasses snae 3 15 3 9 Reed Solomon Operation esses eene nennen nennen entrent enne 3 15 3 9 2 Reed Solomon Code Rate esses esee enne ener stent eterne nns 3 15 3 9 3 Int rleavine on deo dem a ges 3 16 3 10 Asynchronous Overhead Operation Framing Multiplexer Capability 3 17 3 11 Standard IBS Mode ssscsscssscsssssssscrscssccsscencessssssensesecsscesessscsscssssencescsssseneesesssssseessesseees 3 18 3 12 Asynchronous Multiplexer Mode ccccsssscssssscsssscsssscssssccssssscsssssssscssssessssssscsssssssesssssesees 3 19 3 13 ESC Backward Alarm scsccssscsssssccsccsccssessesscssccesssssscsssscnessssssssecsscssessesssesscsssseseesosees 3 19 3 13 1 Disable the ESC Backward
60. Remote Port Control to Remote then set the Multidrop Address as needed followed by setting the Remote Interface to RS232 or RS485 Control and status messages are conveyed between the modem and all subsidiary modems and the host computer using packetized message blocks in accordance with a proprietary communications specification This communication is handled by the Radyne Link Level Protocol RLLP which serves as a protocol wrapper for the RM amp C data Complete information on monitor and control software is contained in the following sections 3 3 3 Ethernet M amp C Port This port is dedicated for Ethernet Communications supporting SNMP FTP and Web Browser The port is configured for 10 Base T communications protocols The Ethernet M amp C Interface requires a standard RJ45 Male connector Refer to Appendix D and for proper setup of the TCP IP interface and Web Browser Setup MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 6 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 3 4 Modem Monitor Status The modems M amp C system is connected to most of the circuitry on any board contained in the chassis These connections provide status on the working condition of the circuitry as well as providing the data required for the various measurements the modem provides The M amp C processes this information and generates status indications as well as alarms when necessary Detailed status information is available via the modems various user interfaces
61. Scroll down Scroll right to the FEATURES Menu Scroll down mo The value displayed top line of this menu is 12 digit Unit ID It is displayed front panel of the modem as 3 sets of 4 digits The second line is the data entry area and is displayed as 3 sets of 4 underscores in a dot delineated format Press ENTER and a cursor will begin flashing in the data entry area Using the numeric keypad enter your 12 digit demonstration code Press ENTER If the code entered is correct the display will display CODE ACCEPTED otherwise the display will read INVALID CODE MN DMD50 Revision 3 B 4 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Front Panel Upgrade Procedure Care should be taken to insure that the demonstration code is entered properly After three unsuccessful attempts to enter a code the front panel upgrade and demonstration capability will be locked out and it will be necessary to cycle power on the modem in order to continue B 4 1 Running in Demonstration Mode Because of the possible interruption in traffic when the demonstration mode expires several indicators are used to inform an operator that the modem is indeed operating in demonstration mode The most obvious of these is that the remote LED is flashing A second indication can be found on the Features Menu as follows From the modem s Main Menu scroll right to the SYSTEM Menu Scroll down Scroll right to the HW FW CONFIG Me
62. Strap COMES e D B PM 3 48 CHAPTER 4 USER INTERFAGCES trien teca epu e ako sacre ER IRE Rue cda 4 1 c MEE RC Titer faces eL 4 1 4 2 Front Panel User Interface 4 1 4 2 1 LED Front Panel Display es coe aa eines 4 2 4 2 2 Cursor Control Arrow Keys ee tue nib Eee b E a SEEE Hae eH e Pe LEER 4 2 4 2 3 Numeric Keypad 2 3 ete ite ette ev the re deep eese eere dee tae desert eee bets 4 2 4 2 4 Front Panel LED Indicators iaito et Se rr en ree Sinden re ER PRAE Te eee ease 4 3 4 3 Parameter Set p 5 teretes eere REE Eeden Eeo beses oe sbecstoctessdscessesesisoeseccs 4 4 4 4 Front Panel Control Screen Menus isssscscstssceciscssectesssevessccsseecussisinsbsensestevesasnsnccestestsnissesseessenseavs 4 4 4 4 1 Menus RM EE 4 4 4 4 2 Modulator Menu Options and Parameters eese enne nre 4 5 4 43 Demodulator Menu Options and 4 11 4 4 4 Interface Menu Options and Parameters sees nennen 4 16 4 4 5 Monitor Menu Options and Parameters eese eene nennen 4 21 4 4 6 Alarms Menu Options and 4 23 4 4 7 System Menu Options and Parameters 4 32 4 4 8 Test Menu Options and 4 41
63. T1 and synchronizes the Drop Processor The Drop Processor extracts the desired time slots from the terrestrial data stream and feeds these channels back to the framer The framer then places dropped terrestrial time slots into the desired satellite channel slots The data is then sent to the Reed Solomon Encoder When enabled the Reed Solomon Encoder encodes the data into Reed Solomon Blocks The blocks are then interleaved and synchronized to the frame pattern as defined by the selected specification IESS 308 IESS 309 DVB etc After Reed Solomon Encoding the composite data and clock are applied to the BB Loopback Circuit Rx Baseband Processing The Receive Processor performs the inverse function of the Tx Processor Data received from the satellite passes through the BB Loopback Circuit to the Reed Solomon Decoder to the Deframer The Deframer acquires the IBS IDR DVB frame synchronizes the Reed Solomon Decoder and extracts the received data and overhead from the frame structure placing the data into the PD Buffer sending the overhead data to the UIM The data is extracted from the buffer and is sent to the UIM Backward Alarm indications are sent to the M amp C Subsystem In Drop and Insert Mode the Insert Processor synchronizes to the incoming terrestrial T1 E1 Data Stream extracts satellite channels from the PD Buffer and then inserts them into the desired terrestrial time slots in the T1 E1 Data Stream Monitor amp
64. Unpack and inspect the modem as follows Step Procedure Cut the tape at the top of the carton indicated by OPEN THIS END Remove the cardboard foam space covering the modem 1 2 3 Remove the modem power cord and user s manual from the carton 4 Save the packing material for storage or reshipment purposes 5 Inspect the equipment for any possible damage incurred during shipment Note If damage is evident contact the carrier and Comtech EF Data immediately and submit a damage report 6 Check the contents against the packing list to verify completeness of the shipment 7 Refer to the sections that follow for further installation instructions The Universal Satellite Modem was carefully packaged to avoid damage and should arrive complete with the following items for proper installation l DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem 2 Power Cord six foot with applicable AC Connector 3 Installation and Operation Manual MN DMD50 Revision 3 2 1 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Installation important Should the AC power cable connector be of the wrong type for the installation either the cable or the power connector end should be replaced 2 2 Installation Requirements The modem is shipped fully assembled It does not require removal of the covers for any purpose in installation The power supply itself is designed for universal application using from 100 to 240 VAC 50 to 60 Hz 1 0A WARNING There are no user servicea
65. Within the normal acquisition range of the demod as follows uncertainty Below 32 ksymbols sec 1 to Rs 2 kHz where Rs symbol rate in ksymbols sec Between 32 and 389 ksymbols sec to a maximum of 32kHz Above 389 ksymbols sec 1 to 0 1Rs kHz up to a maximum of 200 kHz Delay range 0 330 ms Eb No Degradation BPSK 20 3dB QPSK 20 3dB OQPSK 0 3dB equal Inbound Outbound 8 0 5498 8 QAM 0 4dB 16 0 power spectral density For 10 dB power spectral density ratio outbound interferer 10 dB higher than desired inbound add an additional 0 3 dB Monitor Functions Delay in milliseconds Frequency offset between outbound interferer and desired inbound 100 Hz resolution CnC ratio in dB ratio of absolute power outbound interferer to desired inbound 3 14 16 Carrier in Carrier Summary Comtech EF Data s DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier can provide significant savings in operational expenses The following should be considered when evaluating DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier can only be used for full duplex links where the transmitting earth station is able to receive itself e DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier can be used in both bandwidth limited and power limited situations The maximum savings is generally achieved when the original link is symmetric in data rate MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 40 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 14 17 Glossa
66. a maximum unit power consumption of 3 A Refer to Table 5 1 for pinouts Table 5 1 DC Power Ground 54 Chassis Connections Standard 5 4 1 EXT REF J10 The External Reference Port is a 50 Ohm Female BNC Connector and will accept the following frequencies 1 0 1 544 2 0 2 048 5 0 and 10 0 MHz Input level 1 Vpp to 5Vpp Sine or Square wave 5 4 2 TX IF J11 The Transmit IF Output Port is a 75 Ohm Female BNC Connector that is used for 70 140 MHz IF The power level is programmable from 0 to 25 dBm in 0 1 dBm steps The IF Frequency can be programmed to 50 90 MHz or 100 180 MHz in 1 Hz Steps 5 4 5 TX L Band IF J12 The Transmit IF Output Port is a 50 Ohm SMA Female Connector that can be used for L Band IF The power level is programmable from 0 to 25 dBm in 0 1 dBm steps The IF Frequency can be programmed to 950 2050 MHz in 1 Hz Steps MN DMD50 Revision 3 5 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem 5 4 4 RX IF J13 User Interfaces The Receive IF Input Port is a 75 Ohm Female BNC Connector that is used for 70 140 MHz IF If the customer orders the 70 140 MHz IF the Transmit IF Output Port is a 75 Ohm Female BNC Connector 5 4 5 RX L Band IF J14 The Receive IF Input Port is a 50 Ohm SMA Female Connector that can be used for L Band IF The IF Frequency can be programmed from 950 to 2050 MHz in 1 Hz Steps 5 4 6 ALARM J15 The Alarm Port is a 15 Pin Female D Conne
67. and control parameter settings and change their own authentication passwords Admin At this highest access right the users can monitor and control the modems parameters change any user s name and authentication password and modify IP network settings Admin setting allows access to the entire site User to select password The user can modify Authorization Passwords The user name can have up to 14 characters supporting alpha and numeric characters Alpha characters can be entered using the up and down arrow keys Numeric characters can be selected by using the number keys on the front panel The user can clear all characters from the front panel screen Resets group and password NO GROUP GUEST OPER ADMIN Access rights represent the following No Group Denies Access DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem AUTH PASSWORD USER RESET MN DMD50 Revision 3 User Interfaces Guest Users are able to navigate most of the site and view modem parameter settings Oper Users can monitor and control parameter settings and change their own authentication passwords Admin At this highest access right the users can monitor and control the modems parameters change any user s name and authentication password and modify IP network settings Admin setting allows access to the entire site XXxxxxxx User to select password The user can modify the Authorization Passwords The user name can have up
68. drop and insert timeslots is performed automatically and is transparent to the user In PCM 30 mode the user may not select timeslot 16 as a Drop or Insert Timeslot H 1 3 2 PCM 30C The PCM 30C Mode of Operation supports an E1 Interface with Multiframe Alignment MFAS and Channel Associated Signaling CAS In addition the Drop function verifies the received terrestrial CRC checksum and the Insert function calculates the required CRC checksum The user may independently program n timeslots to drop and n timeslots to insert where n 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15 16 20 24 or 30 In addition to the selected Drop timeslots the Transmit Function also extracts the appropriate ABCD signaling bits from terrestrial timeslot 16 for transmission in IBS Frame as required Conversely the Receive Function extracts received ABCD signaling bits from the IBS frame and inserts them in timeslot 16 of the appropriate terrestrial frame This transmission and reception of ABCD signaling based upon the Drop and MN DMD50 Revision 3 H 4 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Drop and Insert D amp I Insert timeslots is performed automatically and is transparent to the user In PCM 30C Mode the user may not select timeslot 16 as a Drop or Insert Timeslot H 1 3 3 PCM 31 The PCM 31 Mode of Operation supports an E1 Interface with no Multiframe Alignment MFAS or Channel Associated Signaling CAS The user may independently program n timeslots to drop and n ti
69. flow control as follows When available buffer space is almost gone the unit sends out a pause frame with the maximum pause time to stop the remote nodes from transmitting The interface sends out another pause frame with the pause time set to zero as soon as free buffer space becomes available J 1 2 Ethernet Daisy Chain When disabled Port 4 JS4 on the Ethernet Data Interface operates normally Data received on Port 4 that is not addressed to other equipment on the LAN side is transmitted over the satellite When Port 4 is selected for Daisy Chain any data received on Port 4 JS4 is forwarded to of the other LAN side ports Ports 1 3 and is not transmitted over the satellite This is extremely useful in a point to multipoint configuration as illustrated in Figure J 1 J 1 3 Ethernet QOS Type When Normal QOS is selected the interface determines a packets priority based on the following 803 3ac Tag when present Pv4 Type of Service Differentiated Services Field pv6 Traffic Class When Port Based QOS is selected the interface determines the priority of a packed based upon the port on which it arrived JS1 JS2 953 954 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 has the highest priority has the second highest priority has the second lowest priority has the lowest priority 2 HH wa J 1 4 Ethernet QOS Queue When Fair Weighted queueing is selected the interface transmits packets at a rate of
70. for this interface are listed in Table 5 12 Table 5 12 J9 HSSI High Speed Serial Interface 50 Pin Connector Pin No Pin No 1 26 X SG Ground 4 3 ReieDaa Output 6 ST SemdTiming SCT pp 02902 S gnabomend 33 TA DTE Available Input Terminal Timing 34 TT SCTE Input Input Signal Name Description Direction 13 38 SG Signal Ground 14 18 39 43 5 Ancillary to DCE Reserved Input SG Signal Ground 4 Ancillary from 20 23 45 48 DCE Reserved Output Test Mode Output ra pane ee MN DMD50 Revision 3 5 14 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces 5 13 ASI DVB M2P Interface Optional 5 13 1 ASI IN J1 The ASI IN Port J1 is supported on the BNC Connector The interface complies with DVB ASI Electrical Specifications 5 13 2 ASI OUT J2 The ASI OUT Port J2 is supported on the BNC Connector The interface complies with DVB ASI Electrical Specifications 5 13 3 DVB M2P IN J3 DVB or M2P IN Port J3 is supported on the DB 25 female connector It complies with RS 422 Electrical Specifications Refer to Table 5 13 for DVB and Table 5 14 for M2P pinouts for this connector MN DMD50 Revision 3 5 15 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Table 5 13 J3 DVB In 25 Pin Female User Interfaces Table 5 14 J3 M2P In 25 Pin Female Pin Number Signal
71. front panel remote and terminal A summary of this information can be connected to external equipment switches or alarms via the open collector and or form C fault connections Form C Contacts The UIM provides three Form C Relays under processor control that appear at J15 Mod Fault De energized when any transmit side fault is detected Demod Fault De energized when any receive side fault is detected Common Fault De energized when any fault that is not explicitly a Tx or Rx Fault such as an M amp C or Power Supply Fault Open Collector Faults 3 4 3 5 The UIM provides two Open Collector Faults that appear at Pins 18 amp 21 on J19 Mod Fault Will sink up to 20 ma maximum until a transmit or common fault is detected Will not sink current if a fault is detected Demod Fault Will sink up to 20 ma maximum until a receive or common fault is detected Will not sink current if a fault is detected The open collector faults are intended for use in redundancy switch applications in order to provide quick status indications Async Port ES ES Communications This port is dedicated for ES ES Communications supported by either RS232 or RS485 signal levels The baud rate and protocol can be selected from the Front Panel The port may be configured for a number of communications protocols Overhead data to from the UIM is routed to from the framer deframer This port is also used by SCC Framing for the in band data Intern
72. is intentionally blank ER DMD50 EA2 THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION UPDATE PLM CO C 0022887 Page 2 of 2 Errata Comtech EF Data Documentation Update DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Manual Part Number MN DMD50 Revision Rev3 Errata Subject Updates to registered trademarks and licenses for Raytheon Applied Signal Technology DoubleTalk and Carrier in Carrier Errata Part Number ER MNDMD50 EB3 CO Number 0023089 Comments Attach Errata to Preface page 1 Note Applied Signal Technology Inc is now Raytheon Applied Signal Technology All references to Applied Signal Technology Inc in this manual are changed to Raytheon Applied Signal Technology Patents and Trademarks See all of Comtech EF Data s Patents and Patents Pending at http patents comtechefdata com Comtech EF Data acknowledges that all trademarks are the property of the trademark owners e DoubleTalk is licensed from Raytheon Applied Signal Technology e DoubleTalk is a registered trademark of Raytheon Applied Signal Technology e Carrier in Carrier is a registered trademark of Comtech EF Data Errata 2 of 2 This page is intentionally blank ER MNDMD50 EB3 THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT SUBJECT TO REVISION UPDATE C 0023089 OMTECH Comtech EF Data is an AS9100 Rev B 1509001 2000 Registered Company EF DATA BENI 4 RADYNE P DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Installation and Ope
73. local modem receiver loses lock The setting can be HOLD no action taken NOMINAL the nominal Transmit Power Setting is used and MAXIMUM the maximum Transmit Power Setting is used Only available when EFAUPC is selected as the framing HOLD NOMINAL MAXIMUM This allows the user to set the Local Transmit Power Setting to be used when the remote modem receiver loses lock The setting can be HOLD no action taken NOMINAL the nominal Transmit Power Setting is used and MAXIMUM the maximum Transmit Power Setting is used The REMOTE AUPC CONFIGURATION Menu contains the remote configuration parameters for the AUPC Function Remote AUPC menus are only available when modem is configured for EF AUPC DISABLE EFDATA Allows the user to enable or disable the AUPC Function of the remote modem The remote AUPC Function is the response of the local modem to commands for an increase or decrease of the Transmit Power in 0 5 dB steps and the command to change to the setting indicated in the REMOTE CL ACTION Menu of the remote modem upon receiver loss of lock DISABLE ENABLE 4 10 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces Allows the user to enable or disable the Baseband Loopback Test Mode of the remote modem TX 2047 TEST DISABLE ENABLE Allows the user to enable or disable the Transmit 2047 Pattern Test Mode of the remote modem RX 2047 BER Reports the BER measurement of the receiver 2047 Pattern Test M
74. look and feel and an appearance that resembles the 50 layout FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MN s EE TESTMODE MINOR ALARM sm TEST MODE MINOR ALARM fj FAUT REMOTE DMD20 Satellite Modem monitor 2 rest neco socouon auec TRANSMIT GENERAL IF Network Spec x StrapCode Cc Frequency MHz 1600000000 Power dBm Carrier Control AUTO z Spectrum NORMAL a Modulation os 2 Spectral Mask 0 26 Compensation dBm MAIN MENU ADDITIONAL INFO FIELDS Technical Specihcabons Product Ophons Troubleshooting AboutUs Contact Us 2006 Radyne Corporabon Monitor and Control Web Page The top of the web page displays an alarm section reflecting the current front panel status of the modem This block will be updated immediately whenever status is changed The navigation scheme consists of gel tabs that correspond to the front panel top level menu selections When the mouse is dragged over a tab it gets highlighted with a rollover effect and a sub level of selections is revealed These correspond to the front panel sub menus Below the menu gel tabs the main menu section will reflect the current programmed control state At the top of the page breadcrumb location identifier reminds the user how the page is selected Location Identifier
75. maps are tables that are used to define and configure the D amp I functions Each map contains up to 30 entries which are enough to define the channel assignments for a T1 24 channel or E1 30 channel frame structure Maps that are created are stored in non volatile battery backed up memory within the modem and remain unchanged after a power down Table H 1 D amp I Multiplexer Map Locations Used D amp I Multiplexer Map Locations Used Data Rate Map Locations Used n 1 Kbps 2 4 8 16 24 30 It is important to understand that each map contains up to 30 usable entries In many cases a smaller number of entries will be relevant except when the data rate is 1920 Kbps in which case 30 entries will used by the multiplexer To determine the number of relevant entries divide the data rate by 64 Kbps For example At 384 Kbps 384 64 6 entries Therefore in this case only the first six entries of the map would be relevant The Modem is equipped with eight permanently stored default maps which are designated ROM 1 through ROM 8 user may also define modify and save an additional eight maps which are designated USER 1 through USER 8 MN DMD50 Revision 3 H 15 50 Universal Satellite Modem Drop and Insert D amp I IMPORTANT ROM maps are read only and may not be modified refer to Table H 2 Table H 2 D amp I ROM Maps 1 1 Time Slot oo an CA
76. modem can be equipped with a 5x10 or better Stability Frequency Reference as an add on enhancement This is a factory upgrade only DC Input Prime Power Allows for an optional DC Input Power Source standard unit only ASI RS 422 Parallel ASI Serial BNC Female DVB M2P Parallel RS 422 DB 25 Female ASI LVDS Parallel ASI Serial BNC Female DVB M2P Parallel LVDS DB 25 Female HSSI High Speed Serial Interface 50 Pin SCSI 2 Type Connector Complies with Cisco Systems in HSSI Design Specification Revision 3 0 MN DMD50 Revision A 1 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Product Options 8 9 10 A 11 A 12 Ethernet Data Interface Four RJ 45 Auto Crossover Auto Sensing 10 100 Ethernet Data Ports Complies with IEEE 802 3 and IEEE 802 3u HSSI G 703 High Speed Serial Interface 50 Pin SCSI 2 Type Connector Complies with Cisco Systems in HSSI Design Specification Revision 3 0 The G 703 interface supports T1 E1 T2 E2 rates balanced or unbalanced It does not support backward alarms HSSI ETHERNET High Speed Serial Interface 50 Pin SCSI 2 Type Connector Complies with Cisco Systems in HSSI Design Specification Revision 3 0 Four RJ 45 Auto Crossover Auto Sensing 10 100 Ethernet Data Ports Complies with IEEE 802 3 and IEEE 802 3u Turbo Product Code Variable Reed Soloman The modem can be equipped with an optional TPC Codec Card This card allows variable Reed Solomon rates
77. network IP ADDR MASK MODEM IP ADDR SERVER IP ADDR ROUTER IP ADDR MN DMD50 Revision 3 XXX XXX XXX XXX Hexidecimal Mask ddd ddd ddd ddd Decimal Mask The IP Address Mask of the local network The mask is expressed in a hexadecimal format and must be a valid TCP IP Mask This field should be set before changes are made to the Modem or Router Address XXX XXX XXX XXX Hexidecimal Address ddd ddd ddd ddd Decimal Mask The IP Address of the modem This address should be consistent for the mask defined This address is expressed in hexadecimal format Broadcast and loop back addresses will not be allowed These are addresses with all subnet bits set to 0 s or 1 s XXX XXX XXX XXX Hexidecimal Address ddd ddd ddd ddd Decimal Address The IP Address of the Boot Server and the address of the SNMP Trap Server when SNMP is active If a server is used and there is no local router this address must be consistent with the modem address If a router has been specified the address is presumed to be reachable via the router Broadcast and loop back addresses will not be allowed These are addresses with all subnet bits set to O s or 15 XXX XXX XXX XXX Hexidecimal Address ddd ddd ddd ddd Decimal Address The IP Address of the Local Network Router If a router is present on the local network this address must be consistent with the IP Mask and the subnet of the modem If no router is present then the address should be s
78. on a spectrum analyzer Carrier 1 and Carrier 2 shown here for reference only are overlapping thus sharing the same spectrum The Radyne DMD50 CnC module operates on the near zero signal before the demodulator and is waveform agnostic This means that no prior knowledge of the underlying modulation FEC or any other waveform specific parameter is required in order to perform the signal suppression operation The only caveat to this is that the waveform must be sufficiently random MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 25 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation CDM 625 with Cnc 625 with Cnc 292 im m 582 DMD50 Satellite Modem DMD50 Satellite Modem Figure 3 12 Same Link Using Radyne DMD50 and DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier RL 45 08 dBm NKR ni FRG 78 888 RL 45 88 i WITEW dU dV T T T 53 48 dBm ATTEN iu qB Composite 88 dB DIV e 1 Carrier 1 Sgen nonus 4 1 A 4 4 ee 4 j T 1 4 1 _ 2 Carrier 2 Hf t 4 jj e V we CENTER 78 080 SPAN 2 000 MH wear SPAN 2 000 MHz CENTER 70 505 e Hs RB 21 5 kHz UB 100 ST p 791 sec RB 21 5 VB 30 0 Hz Without DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier With DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier Traditional Full Duplex Link D
79. satisfies with exemptions the requirements specified in the European Union Directive on the Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive 2002 95 EC EU RoHS EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility In accordance with European Directive 2004 108 EEC the DMD50 has been shown by independent testing to comply with the following standards Emissions EN 55022 Class B Limits and methods of measurement of radio interference characteristics of Information Technology Equipment Also tested to FCC Part 15 Class B Immunity EN 55024 Information Technology Equipment Immunity Characteristics Limits and Methods of Measurement Additionally the DMD50 has been shown to comply with the following standards EN 61000 3 2 Harmonic Currents Emission EN 61000 3 3 voltage Fluctuations and Flicker To ensure that the Modem continues to comply with these standards observe IMPORTANT the following instructions e Connections to the transmit and receive IF ports should be made using a good quality coaxial cable For example RG58 or RG59 for BNC IF connectors and LMR200 LMR240 or equivilant for the L band SMA IF ports All D type connectors attached to the rear panel must have back shells that provide continuous metallic shielding Cable with a continuous outer shield either foil or braid or both must be used and the shield must be bonded to the back shell e The equipment must be operated with its cover on at all times If it bec
80. the Comtech EF Data Technical Publications Department TechnicalPublications comtechefdata com Trademarks Product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged Copyright 2011 Comtech EF Data This manual is proprietary to Comtech EF Data and is intended for the exclusive use of Comtech EF Data s customers No part of this document may in whole or in part be copied reproduced distributed translated or reduced to any electronic or magnetic storage medium without the express written consent of a duly authorized officer of Comtech EF Data DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Revision 3 Preface MN DMD50 Conventions and References Related Documents The following documents are referenced in this manual e EN300 421 and EN301 210 ETSI e ETSI EN302 307 INTELSAT Earth Station Standards IESS 308 309 310 and 315 e EUTELSAT SMS Metric Conversion Metric conversion information is located on the inside back cover of this manual This information is provided to assist the operator in cross referencing non Metric to Metric conversions DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Revision 3 Preface MN DMD50 Cautions and Warnings WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation that if not avoided ANNE could result in death or serious injury CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation that if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury
81. time 123ms TTL 64 Ping statistics for 172 18 100 215 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 0 loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum 0ms Maximum 123ms Average 58ms 4 If the ping is unsuccessful the screen will display C gt ping 172 18 100 215 Pinging 172 18 100 215 with 32 bytes of data Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Ping statistics for 172 18 100 215 Packets Sent 4 Received 0 Lost 4 100 loss Check the following items that may lead to the unsuccessful response MN DMD50 Revision 3 F 6 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem TCP IP Ethernet Setup a Verify that the correct cables are connected to the Ethernet port and that they are secured b The Link Light is illuminated The IP Address that is used matches the Modem s IP Address d The Server and Modem are on the same subnet MN DMD50 Revision 3 F 7 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem TCP IP Ethernet Setup Notes MN DMD50 Revision 3 F 8 G 1 G 1 1 Appendix G AUPC Operation Automatic Uplink Power Control AUPC Operation The modem has an optional built in provision for Automatic Uplink Power Control AUPC AUPC is useful when operating power levels are affected by environmental changes in the atmosphere AUPC attempts to adjust local power output to maintain a constant E N at the receiver location
82. to complete the PC Configuration Note some computers may require that the computer be restarted for the changes to take effect nternet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Box 5 Toreconnect the computer to a network select the Obtain an IP address automatically selection in the screen shown above MN DMD50 Revision 3 F 5 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem TCP IP Ethernet Setup F 5 Testing the Ethernet Connection using the Ping Program Optional To verify that connectivity and settings are correct use the Ping command to report if the Host Equipment is correctly responding This is accomplished by opening the MSDOS Command Prompt and executing a Ping command as shown in the following example 1 Open MSDOS Command Prompt The Screen will display Microsoft Windows XP Version 5 1 2600 C Copyright 1985 2001 Microsoft Corp 2 At the Command Prompt Enter ping 172 18 100 215 Enter the IP Address of the equipment to be tested The screen will display Microsoft Windows XP Version 5 1 2600 C Copyright 1985 2001 Microsoft Corp C gt ping 172 18 100 215 3 If the ping is successful the screen will display C gt ping 172 18 100 215 Pinging 172 18 100 215 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 172 18 100 215 bytes 32 time 109ms TTL 64 Reply from 172 18 100 215 bytes 32 time 1ms TTL 64 Reply from 172 18 100 215 bytes 32 time 2ms TTL 64 Reply from 172 18 100 215 bytes 32
83. to our previous calculation gives 662500 bps Still saving over 20 000 bps compared to the Drop amp Insert open network standard Example 2c Change to Enhanced Async with In Band Baud Rate of 1200 X Truncation of 1200 10 125 X Truncation of 0 96 0 The rate stays at previous value of 662500 With 10 slots there is no increase required to carry 1200 baud Enhanced Async It is passed transparently in the Efficient Drop amp Insert overhead MN DMD50 Revision 3 I 5 50 Universal Satellite Modem Efficient Drop and Insert D amp I Notes MN DMD50 Revision 3 1 6 Appendix J Ethernet Data Interface J 1 J 1 1 Setup Configuring the modem to use the Ethernet Data Interface Optional When the optional Ethernet Data Interface Card is installed all of the Ethernet related menus become available and can be used to control the interface as follows Under the Interface Menu Under the Tx Setup Menu Set the Terrestrial Interface to Ethernet Set the Ethernet Flow Control as desired refer to Section 4 8 1 for details Set the Ethernet Daisy Chain as desired refer to Section 4 8 2 for details Set the Ethernet QOS Type as desired refer to Section 4 8 3 for details Set the Ethernet QOS Queue as desired refer to Section 4 8 4 for details Set the Tx Clock to SCTE Set the Tx Clock Polarity to Normal Under the Interface Menu Under th
84. 0 24 30 31 64 128 192 256 320 384 512 640 708 960 1024 1280 1536 1920 Kbps Closed Network Satellite Overhead 0 4 1 31 Any combination A variety of standard interfaces are available for the DMD50 modem in stand alone applications 7 8 IDR ESC T2 E2 Interface Optional G 703 T1 100 G 703 E1 G 703 T2 100 G 703 E2 1 544 Mbps 100 Ohm Balanced AMI and B8ZS 2 048 Mbps 75 Ohm Unbalanced and 120 Ohm Balanced HDB3 6 312 Mbps 75 Ohm Unbalanced and 110 Ohm Balanced B8ZS and B6ZS 8 448 Mbps 75 Ohm BNC Unbalanced HDB3 7 9 IDR ESC T3 E3 STS1 Interface Optional G 703 T1 DSX1 G 703 El G 703 T2 DSX2 G 703 E2 G 703 E3 MN DMD50 Revision 3 1 544 Mbps 100 Ohm Balanced AMI and B8ZS 2 048 Mbps 75 Ohm BNC Unbalanced and 120 Ohm Balanced HDB3 6 312 Mbps 75 Ohm BNC Unbalanced and 110 Ohm Balanced B8ZS and B6ZS 8 448 Mbps 75 Ohm BNC Unbalanced HDB3 34 368 Mbps 75 Ohm BNC Unbalanced 7 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 14 7 15 7 16 7 17 G 703 T3 44 736 Mbps 75 Ohm BNC Unbalanced G 703 STSI 51 84Mbps 75 Ohm BNC Unbalanced IBS Synchronous Interface Standard MIL 188 144A RS 422 530 Rates Differential Clock Data DCE ITU V 35 Rates Differential Clock Data DCE RS 232 DCE up to 200 Kbps High Speed Serial Interface HSSD HSSI HSSI Serial 50 Pin SCSI 2 Type Connector Female ASI
85. 00 LDPC TPC Card OQPSK TPC 7 8 31500 17500000 LDPC TPC Card TRE 2 3 9600 52000000 TPC 3 4 10800 20000000 Supercard TPC 7 8 12600 20000000 Supercard TPC 495 9504 6312000 Supercard TPC 793 15225 6312000 Supercard TPC 750 20000001 52000000 Supercard TPC 875 20000001 52000000 Supercard LDPC 2 3 36000 20000000 LDPC TPC Card LDPC 3 4 40500 20000000 LDPC TPC Card 8QAM TPC 2 3 36000 20000000 LDPC TPC Card MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 7 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications 8QAM TPC 3 4 40500 20000000 LDPC TPC Card 8QAM TPC 7 8 48000 20000000 LDPC TPC Card 8QAM LDPC 2 3 36000 20000000 LDPC TPC Card 8QAM LDPC 3 4 40500 20000000 LDPC TPC Card 16QAM VIT 3 4 14400 20000000 16QAM VIT 7 8 16800 20000000 16QAM TPC 3 4 14400 20000000 Supercard 16QAM TPC 7 8 16800 20000000 Supercard 16QAM TPC 495 9504 6312000 Supercard 16QAM TPC 793 15225 6312000 Supercard 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM LDPC 3 4 54000 20000000 16QAM TPC 3 4 54000 20000000 16QAM TPC 7 8 63000 20000000 7 21 2 DVB TPC 750 TPC 875 20000001 20000001 187 Mode 52000000 52000000 Supercard Supercard Modulation Code Rate VIT 1 2 Min Data Rate 4583333 Max Data Rate VIT 2 3 6111111 VIT 3 4 6875000 VIT 5 6 7638888 VIT 7 8 VIT 1 2 8020833 9166666 VIT 2 3 12222222 VIT 3 4 13750000 VIT 5 6 15277777 VIT 7 8 16041666 18333333
86. 14 3 Estimating PSD Ratio Using Spectrum Analyzer PSD Ratio or CnC Ratio can also be estimated using a Spectrum Analyzer capable of integrating the signal power in a given bandwidth CnC Ratio in dB Powerc in dBm in dBm PSD Ratio in dB Powerc 10 log BW in Hz Powerc2 10 log BW in Hz CnC Ratio 10 log BWc BWc If the two carriers have same Symbol Rate Bandwidth then the CnC Ratio is same as the PSD Ratio MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 39 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 14 15 DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier Specifications Operating Mode Requires the two links to share a common carrier frequency Outbound and Inbound symbol rates do not have to be equal Power Spectral Density Ratio BSPK QPSK 8 PSK 8 QAM 7 dB to 11 dB ratio of power spectral density and CnC Ratio outbound interferer to desired inbound 16 QAM 7 dB to 7 dB ratio of power spectral density outbound interferer to desired inbound Note With asymmetric carriers the absolute power ratio or CnC ratio would be different depending on the ratio of the symbol rates Example Outbound interferer 1 Msymbols sec Desired Inbound 500 ksymbols sec Ratio of power spectral density 7 dB Absolute power ratio CnC Ratio 7dB 10 log Outbound desired symbol rate 10 dB Maximum Symbol Rate Ratio 3 1 TX RX or RX TX Inbound Outbound frequency
87. 1E 8 1E 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Eb No in dB Figure 7 8 DMD50 16QAM BER Performance Viterbi w RS Note Eb No values include the effect of using Differential Decoding MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 17 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications 7 22 9 BER Performance 16QAM Turbo 1E 1 16QAM Uncoded Theory 1E 2 Turbo Decoder Typical Performance 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 BER 1E 6 Turbo 0 495 1E 7 Turbo 0 793 1E 8 1E 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Eb No in dB Figure 7 9 DMD50 16QAM BER Performance Turbo Note Eb No values include the effect of using interleaving and maximum iterations MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 18 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications 7 22 10 BER Performance O QPSK Turbo 1 1 B O QPSK Uncoded Theory 1E 2 Turbo Decoder Specification 3 4 Rate 1E 3 1E 4 Specification Specification 1 2 Rate 7 8 Rate 1E 5 BER 1E 6 1E 7 Typical Performance 1E 8 1E 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Eb No in dB Figure 7 10 DMD50 O QPSK BER Performance Turbo MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 19 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications 7 22 11 BER Performance 8PSK Turbo
88. 200 1 7 2 069 951 1 011 MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 45 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 072 000 19 200 1 7 3 093 943 1 007 4 096 000 19 200 1 7 4 117 951 1 005 6 312 000 19 200 1 7 6 337 248 1 004 6 312 000 19 200 1 3 6 337 606 1 004 6 312 000 19 200 1 1 6 350 418 1 006 3 15 4 Actual Overhead Rate Calculation The following is the actual calculation the modem does to calculate the overhead ratio 1 The modem calculates the minimum in band rate to limit the size of the user data slots to 2 500 bits the result is truncated to an integer Minimum In Band User Data Rate Control Ratioy Control Ratio 1 250 2 Using the bigger of Minimum In Band or the selected In Band the modem calculates the number of bits for each user data slot result is truncated to an integer Slot Bits User Data Rate Control Ratio 10 In band Rate Control Ratio 1 The actual ratio the modem uses 15 Actual Ratio Slot Bits 10 Slot Bits Example 1 User Data Rate 1 024 000 bps In Band Rate 19 200 bps Control Ratio 1to7 Minimum In Band 1 024 000 7 7 1 250 3 584 less than In Band Rate Slot Bits 1 024 000 7 10 19 200 7 1 466 Actual Ratio 466 10 466 1 021 Example 2 User Data Rate 6 312 000 bps In Band Rate 19 200 bps Control Ratio 1107 Minimum In Band 6 312 000 7 7 1 T 250
89. 22 092 more than In Band Rate Slot Bits 6 312 000 7 10 22 092 7 1 2 500 Actual Ratio 2 500 10 2 500 1 004 MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 46 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 15 5 SCC Overhead Channel Setup 1 Set the Framing Mode located under Mod and Demod Data Menus to SCC After doing this two new menus will appear to the right of the Framing Menu for both the Mod and Demod The new menus will be SCC CTL RATIO SCC INBAND RATE 2 Set the desired SCC control ratio SCC CTL RATIO 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 This allows the user to simulate the framing used by the Satellite Control Channel Option Pass Thru Mode only The SCC CTL RATIO is the ratio of overhead in band data to synchronizing words 3 Set the desired SCC in band rate SCC INBAND RATE 300 to 200000 This allows the user to request the rate of in band data for the overhead channel This sets the overhead amount only The actual amount of data that can be passed through the overhead channel will be set under ES Baud Rate see Step 6 below 4 Under the Interface General menus locate the TX ASYNC MODE menu 5 Under the TX ASYNC MODE Menu set the desired ES Interface type ES INTERFACE RS 232 RS 485 This allows the user to select the interface type 6 Under TX ASYNC MODE Menu set the desired baud rate for the ASYNC Port J17 This will be the baud rate that will pass through the overhea
90. 4 2 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces Moves Moves Date Time Changes N A N A N A Digit Position Position Left Right Moves Moves Changes Increments Decrements Cursor 1 Cursor 1 Digit Digit Value Digit Value Position Position NA ve Left Right mereme Decremert Moves Moves Clears to Clears to Changes Cursor 1 Cursor 1 Left of Right of Text Strings Character Character ee Character Value Value Position Position Cursor Cursor Left Right Inclusive Inclusive 4 2 4 Front Panel LED Indicators Eight LEDs on the Front Panel Refer to Table 4 3 indicate the status of operation The LED colors maintain a consistent meaning Green signifies that the indication is appropriate for normal operation Yellow means that there is a condition not proper for normal operation and Red indicates a fault condition that will result in lost communications LED Signal Lock Green Table 4 3 LED Color Reference Modem LED Indicators Indicates that the unit is turned on Indicates a hardware fault for the unit enabled Modulator LED Indicators Indicates that the transmitter is on Major Alarm Indicates that Transmit Direction has failed losing traffic Indicates that a Transmit Warning Condition exists Test Mode Yellow Indicates that the transmitter is involved in a current Test Mode activity Demodul
91. 5 3 5 3 2 DC Power Input Switch deme pedet d e Fee e eee eret ped eene 5 3 5 4 Chassis Connections Standard ee eese etn nene tese ease sese eee eese sese sese etes 5 3 5 4 1 EXT REP e terno te t eter trt tet taie tete M o Rl UM 5 3 5 4 2 TX TE IH re e or e EE P P ER e CEPI 5 3 5 4 3 TX I Band ie at ba ase Hales Oe NEU raten 5 3 5 4 4 LS go 5 4 5 4 5 R2GTE BandJlE VEA puri e bti RR ERREUR 5 4 5 4 6 ALARME VAD e e eere eer eere eer ceca ERE EET PNE eR 5 4 5 4 7 EXT CECEK JIO ueniet pde pennae n ABI 5 4 5 4 8 ASYNGCA TI ideae Gta eet eR I t t HER ete AS HE Ue ERES 5 5 5 4 9 Hom 5 5 P0 iter te ett eroe Ito n Nee et ect oe eet tue 5 5 SATE REMOTE 20 rite tee te nete AS ath e ER m SS 5 7 54 12 ETHER T ete iiie tb ile ict adde 5 7 5 5 G 703 IDR IBS Interface Optional csscccscscsscssccsscssscscsssecssscssscsesscsscsssesssssseessoesseeees 5 7 5 6 ESC ALARM J ee 5 8 5 7 C ELS MIONR PARE 5 9 5 8 L AI RA 5 10 5 9 GMI BAL 5 10 5 9 1
92. 6 5 62 2 1 L Major Alarms cit ti eae don en nada 6 5 6 2 2 1 2 Minor Sa a A es 6 5 6 2 2 1 3 Equipment 6 6 62 22 Watched Alarms ree risa val 6 6 9 2 2 3 Backward ATaEms noon oA 6 6 6 3 IBS Fault Conditions and Actions cccsssscccssssscscssssscccssssccccssssccccssssccccssncccesssscccesssceeessnes 6 6 CHAPTER 7 TECHNICAL 7 1 7 1 Data ICI EE M 7 1 vii Table of Contents Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem MN DMD50 7 2 Modulator 7 1 7 3 Dem OCU at OP ET 7 2 7 4 Plesioclironous Buffer ceiirieer eve Lao seva saos eH TR oo 7 3 7 5 Monitor and Control e E 7 3 7 6 DMD50 Drop and Insert Optional ssessoesooescoesooessoecsosssosssosesocesocessessocesseesscsssesssesesesssesssese 7 3 7 7 Terrestrial IMterfaces 7 3 7 8 IDR ESC T2 E2 Interface Optional scsscssscssscsssssssscssscscssscssscscsssssesssssessssesssesssesesesees 7 3 7 9 IDR ESC T3 E3 STS1 Interface Optional scssccssscssssssssccssccsscsessscesscsssessssssssssssesssees 7 3 7 10 IBS Synchronous Interface Standard
93. 8 4 2 and 1 from the highest priority queue to the lowest respectively With fair weighted queueing all queues with data in them are guaranteed to receive some bandwidth MN DMD50 Revision J 2 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Ethernet Data Interface Setup J 1 5 When Strict Priority is selected the interface transmits packets from the highest priority queue until it is empty It then begins transmitting data from the next highest priority queue If higher priority data arrives the interface finishes the current packet and then goes back to transmitting packets from the higher priority queue until it is again empty Care must be taken when selecting Strict Priority as it is entirely possible for the lower priority queues to be stalled indefinitely Setting Up The DMD20 DMD20 LBST Ethernet Bridge To Operate Like A FIFO In certain circumstances it may be desirable to have the Ethernet interface operate in a FIFO like manner with no reordering of packets This can be established by using a single port on the Ethernet interface and setting the Ethernet QOS Type to Port Based and the Ethernet QOS Queue to Strict Priority When Setup and used in theis manner the packets will be transmitted in the exact order in which they are received DMD20 Router Remote DMD20 Router DMD20 Router LBST Figure J 1 Point to Multipoint with Daisy Chaining MN DMD50 Revision J 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Ethernet Data Inter
94. 8000 SEQ 7 8 8400 2048000 TPC 1 2 4582 9545454 Supercard TPC 3 4 7200 15000000 Supercard TPC 7 8 8400 17500000 Supercard TPC 750 20000001 39000000 Supercard TPC 875 20000001 45500000 Supercard TPC 495 4752 6312000 Supercard TPC 793 7612 6312000 Supercard LDPC 1 2 18000 10000000 LDPC TPC Card LDPC 2 3 13333000 LDPC TPC Card MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 6 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications QPSK LDPC 3 4 TPC 1 2 TPC 3 4 TPC 7 8 NONE 27000 9600 15000000 9545400 15000000 17500000 20000000 LDPC TPC Card LDPC TPC Card LDPC TPC Card LDPC TPC Card VIT 1 2 4800 20000000 VIT 3 4 7200 20000000 VIT 7 8 8400 20000000 SEQ 1 2 4800 2048000 SEQ 3 4 7200 2048000 SEQ 7 8 8400 2048000 TPC 1 2 4582 9545454 Supercard TPC 3 4 7200 15000000 Supercard TPC 7 8 8400 17500000 Supercard TPC 750 20000001 39000000 Supercard TPC 875 20000001 45500000 Supercard TPC 495 4752 6312000 Supercard TPC 793 7612 6312000 Supercard LDPC 1 2 18000 10000000 LDPC TPC Card OQPSK LDPC 2 3 24000 13333000 LDPC TPC Card OQPSK LDPC 3 4 27000 15000000 LDPC TPC Card OQPSK TPC 1 2 18000 9545400 LDPC TPC Card OQPSK TPC 3 4 27000 150000
95. A Direction Receive Audio 1A ESCAUDRX 1A Ground GND Transmit Audio 2B ESCAUDTX 2B Receive Audio 2B ESCAUDRX 2B Transmit Audio 1B ESCAUDTX 1B Receive Audio 1B ESCAUDRX 1B Transmit Audio 2A ESCAUDTX 2A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Receive Audio 2A Signal Name Send Data A ESCAUDRX 2A Receive Data A Ground Synchronous Data Send Timing B Synchronous Data Receive Timing B Send Data B Receive Data B Synchronous Data Send Timing A O CO WIE OD tA BY Go RO MN DMD50 Revision 3 Synchronous Data Receive Timing A DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem 5 15 2 8K DATA J3 User Interfaces The 8K Data Port allows for communications between Earth Stations It is a 15 Pin Female D Connector that complies with IESS 308 Refer to Table 5 20 for pinouts Table 5 20 SK DATA Port 15 Pin Female D Connector J3 Signal Name Receive Octet B Signal Direction Receive Clock B Receive Data B No Connection NC No Connection NC Transmit Data A ESCTXD A Transmit Clock A ESCTXC A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Transmit Octet A ESCTXO A Receive Octet A ESCRXO A Receive Clock A ESCRXC A Receive Data A ESCRXD A Ground GND Transmit Data B ESCTXD B Transmit Clock B ESCTXC B Transmit Octet B 5 15 3 703
96. Browser Refer to Section 4 10 42 Front Panel User Interface The Front Panel allows for complete control and monitor of all parameters and functions via a keypad LCD display and status LEDs The front panel layout is shown in Figure 4 1 showing the location and labeling of the front panel The front panel is divided into four functional areas the LCD Front Panel Display the Cursor Control Arrow Keys the Numeric Keypad and the Front Panel LED Indicators each described in Table 4 1 P woo DEMO TRANDMITON ams SIGNAL LOOK POWER mms MAJOR ALARM MAJOR ALARM FAULT we NOR ALARM EVENT em TEST MODE mm TERT MODE um REMOTE Figure 4 1 Front Panel MN DMD50 Revision 3 4 1 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces Table 4 1 Front Panel Description Number Description Function LCD Front Panel Display Displays operating parameters and Configuration data 2 Cursor Control Arrow Controls the up down right and left motion of the cursor in the Keys LCD Display window Numeric Keypad Allows entry of numeric data and Clear and Enter function keys 4 Front Panel LED See Paragraph 4 1 4 below for an itemized description of these Indicators LEDs 4 2 1 LCD Front Panel Display The front panel display is a 2 line by 16 character LCD display The display is lighted and the brightness can be set to increase when the front panel is currently in use The LCD display automaticall
97. C 3 4 and required 3 9 MHz of leased bandwidth the Carrier in Carrier link was based on QPSK LDPC 3 4 and QPSK LDPC 1 2 and required 2 8 MHz of leased bandwidth The savings summary is as follows Original Link With Carrier in Carrier and LDPC Item Savings E SNP Sd i Data Rate kbps 3000 1000 3000 1000 Modulation QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK FEC TPC 3 4 TPC 3 4 LDPC 3 4 LDPC 1 2 Occupied BW MHZ 2 8 0 9 3 7 2 8 1 4 2 8 Power Eq BW MHz 3 3 0 6 3 9 2 5 0 3 2 8 Leased BW MHz 3 9 2 8 27 5 Hub HPA W 26 0 20 3 22 Remote HPA W 10 6 6 4 40 If this link was designed using QPSK LDPC 3 4 in both directions it would have required Occupied BW Power Eq BW 3 0 MHz 7 2 increase in Power Eq BW Leased BW 3 0MHz 7 2 increase Leased BW menea Remote HPA 30 increase in Remote power MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 33 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 14 9 3 Power Limited Links Carrier in Carrier can provide substantial savings even when the original link is power limited Spreading the carrier by using a lower modulation and or FEC along with latest FEC such as VersaFEC can substantially reduce the total power which can then be traded with bandwidth using Carrier in Carrier The concept is illustrated with the following examples The conventional link is using 8 PSK TPC 3 4 Switching to VersaFEC an
98. D YY TIME HH MM SS CONFIG COPY FRONT PANEL menu BKLT LEVEL BKLT TIMEOUT KEY CLICK MENU NAVIGATION MN DMD50 Revision 3 Allows the user to enter the current date Allows the user to enter the current time Current CFG1 CFG10 Allows user to copy save and recall modem configurations LOW MED HIGH Allows the user to enter the backlight intensity level 00 99 Allows the user to enter the length of time in seconds of keyboard inactivity before the backlight shuts off 00 no timeout ON OFF Allows the user to enable or disable the audible beep each time a key is pressed Illegal entries will still cause a beep to be heard STANDARD FLOATING Standard This setting has a fixed starting point for all sub menus Floating Sub menus are floating always returning to the last menu that was accessed DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces LED TEST ENTER Allows user to test all front panel LEDs REMOTE CONTROL TERMINAL COMPUTER Allows the user to select between terminal RS 232 control and remote port M amp C RS 232 485 control TERMINAL menu TYPE VT 100 WYSES0 VIEWPOINT Allows the user to select the emulation type BAUD RATE 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 Allows the user to enter the terminal baud rate REMOTE PORT menu ADDRESS 32 255 Allows the user to enter the Remote Port Multidrop Address BAUD RATE 300 600 1200 2400
99. DMD50 Revision 3 H 11 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Drop and Insert D amp I Under Interface Under RX Setup Set Rx Type according to your hardware configuration Set Buff Size to desired depth Under Rx D amp I Set Insert Mode T1 D4 Set T1 E1 Frm Src External Use SATCh TS edit capability to define proper mapping of Satellite Channels to insert Terrestrial Slots Use Map Copy to copy Rx Edit to Rx Active Under Demodulator Under Demod IF Set Frequency to desired value Under Demodulator Set Network Spec Drop amp Insert Example 2 Multidestinational Remote Site Programming Drop 512 Kbps from a T1 trunk 3 4 Rate Viterbi Extract 512 Kbps from a 1536 Kbps carrier and insert into a T1 trunk 3 4 Rate Viterbi Drop 512 Kbps from a T1 trunk 3 4 Rate Viterbi Configuration setup is exactly as previously shown in Example 1 Extract 512 Kbps from a 1536 Kbps carrier and insert into a T1 trunk 3 4 Rate Viterbi Under Interface Under RX Setup Set Rx Type according to your hardware configuration Set Buff Size to desired depth Under Rx D amp I Set Insert Mode T1 D4 Set T1 El Frm Srce External Use SATCh TS edit capability to define proper mapping of Satellite Channels to insert Terrestrial Slots For Satellite Channels that are not to be inserted enter No Insert for the Terrestrial Slot Use Map Copy to copy Rx Edit to Rx Active Under Demodulator Under Demod Data Set Data Rate 1536000 Set Conv Enc 3
100. Demodulation IF Tuning Range L Band Tuning Range Impedance Connector Return Loss Spectrum Input Level Total Input Power FEC MN DMD50 Revision 3 Technical Specifications 2 3 Rate Trellis Turbo Product Code Optional SuperCard ONLY BPSK 21 44 QPSK OQPSK 1 2 3 4 7 8 lt 20Mbps 8PSK 3 4 7 8 20Mbps 16QAM 344 7 8 20Mbps QPSK OQPSK 750 875 gt 20Mbps 8PSK 16QAM 750 875 gt 20Mbps Legacy Turbo Rates 0 495 0 793 LDPC TPC Optional BPSK 1 2 lt 20Mbps LDPC QPSK OQPSK 1 2 2 3 3 4 lt 20Mbps LDPC 8PSK 8QAM 2 3 3 4 lt 20Mbps LDPC 16QAM 3 4 lt 20Mbps LDPC BPSK 21 44 TPC QPSK OQPSK 1 2 2 3 3 4 7 8 lt 20Mbps TPC 8QAM 8PSK 2 3 3 4 7 8 lt 20Mbps TPC 16QAM 3 4 7 8 lt 20Mbps TPC Reed Solomon INTELSAT DVB Optional Custom N K Reed Solomon Internal External Rx Recovered 5x10 BPSK QPSK OQPSK 8PSK 8QAM 16QAM 50 to 90 100 to 180 MHz in 1 Hz Steps 950 to 2050 MHz in 1 Hz Steps IF 75 Ohm 50 Ohm Optional L Band 50 Ohm BNC 75 Ohm SMA 50 Ohm L Band IF 1 5 1 L Band 2 0 1 Meets INTELSAT IESS 308 309 310 Compliant 55 to 10 dBm 5 dBm or 40 dBc the Lesser Viterbi K 7 at 1 2 3 4 and 7 8 2 3 Rate Trellis Turbo Product Code Optional SuperCard ONLY BPSK 21 44 QPSK OQPSK 1 2 3 4 7 8 lt 20Mbps 8PSK 3 4 7 8 lt 20Mbps 16QAM 3 4 7 8 lt 20Mbps QPSK OQPSK 750 875 gt 20Mbps 8PSK 16QAM 750 875 gt 20Mbps Legacy Turbo R
101. ER IN CARRIER i BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO COMMISSION A SATELLITE LINK USING CARRIER Space segment costs are typically the most significant operating expense for any satellite based service having a direct impact on the viability and profitability of the service For a satellite transponder that has finite resources in terms of bandwidth and power the leasing costs are determined by bandwidth and power used Therefore a satellite circuit should be designed for optimal utilization to use a similar share of transponder bandwidth and power The traditional approach to balancing a satellite circuit once the satellite and earth station parameters are fixed involves trade off between modulation and coding A lower order modulation requires less transponder power while using more bandwidth conversely higher order modulation reduces required bandwidth albeit at a significant increase in power Comtech EF Data has added a new dimension to satellite communication optimization DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier 3 14 1 What is DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier The Radyne DMD50 DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier option utilizes a patented US 6 859 641 signal processing algorithm developed by Applied Signal Technology Inc that allows both the forward and reverse carriers of a full duplex link to share the same segment of transponder bandwidth using patented Adaptive Cancellation Applied Signal uses the term DoubleTalk and Comtech EF Data refers
102. ES Receive Data Input B ES RXD B MN DMD50 Revision 3 5 12 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces L3 60 Receive 8 Kbps ClockOutput B ESCRXCB Output IDR ESC Backward Alarm Out 4 Normally Open ESCBWO 4NO 66 IBS Receive OctetOutput B RXOB Output 68 Synchronous Data Receiver Ready B SYNCRR B Output 5 9 2 SD DDI J6 The Send Data Drop Data In Port Unbalanced is a 75 Ohm Female BNC Connector 5 9 3 DDO J7 The Drop Data Out Port Unbalanced is a 75 Ohm Female BNC Connector 5 9 4 IDI J8 The Insert Data In Port Unbalanced is a 75 Ohm Female BNC Connector 5 9 5 SD IDO J9 The Send Data Insert Data Out Port Unbalanced is a 75 Ohm Female BNC Connector 5 10 Ethernet Data Interface Optional The optional DMD50 Ethernet Data Interface provides four RJ 45 Auto Crossover and Auto Sensing 10 100 Ethernet Data Ports JS1 through JS4 may be referred to Port 1 through Port 4 respectively MN DMD50 Revision 3 5 13 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces 5 11 5 12 High Speed Serial Interface HSSI Optional HSSI J6 The HSSI High Speed Serial Interface J6 complies with the HSSI Functional and Electrical Specifications The physical interface is a 50 Pin SCSI 2 Type Connector Electrical levels are ECL Gapped clocking not supported The pinouts
103. Ethernet WAN Indicates that the WAN Port is down MN DMD50 Revision 3 6 2 DMD50 Univeral Satellite Modem 6 2 1 2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Major Rx Alarms Alarm Possible Cause FPGA CFG Indicates a receive FPGA hardware failure DSP CFG Indicates a receive DSP failure SIGNAL LOCK Indicates that the demod is unable to lock to a signal FRAME LOCK Indicates that the Framing Unit is unable to find the expected framing pattern MULTIFRAME LOCK Indicates that the Framing Unit is unable to find the expected framing pattern LB SYNTH PLL Indicates that the Rx L Band Synthesizer is not locked This alarm will flash on during certain modem parameter changes A solid indication points toward a configuration problem within the modem IF SYNTH PLL Indicates that the Rx IF Synthesizer is not locked This alarm will flash on during certain modem parameter changes A solid indication points toward a configuration problem within the modem Ethernet WAN 6 2 1 3 Indicates that the WAN Port is down Minor Tx Alarms Alarm Possible Cause TERR CLK ACT Indicates no Terrestrial Clock activity TERR DATA ACT Indicates no Tx Data activity TX TERR AIS Indicates that AIS has been detected in the Tx Data Stream Dnl FRAME LOCK When running Drop Mode indicates that the framing unit is unable to find the exported terrestrial framing pattern DnI M FRAME L
104. HA to TS4 2 After the timeslots are assigned properly scroll to the Mapping Menu and use the above procedure to enter the settings into the modem 3 Set the display to read Map Copy RX EDIT RX ACTIVE 4 Press ENTER to enter the settings into the modem MN DMD50 Revision 3 H 7 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Drop and Insert D amp I To View the current Timeslot Assignment 1 If there is a question of the channels not being entered properly the Mapping Menu may be used to see how the channels timeslots are configured in the modem 2 Use ENTER and the Arrow Keys to make the mapping menu read for the Tx Side Map Copy TX ACTIVE gt TX EDIT 3 Press ENTER The modem has now copied the current Tx Settings to the Tx Channel Timeslot Display 4 For Rx Side Map Copy RX ACTIVE RX EDIT 5 Press ENTER The modem has now copied the current Rx Settings to the Rx Channel Timeslot display It is not mandatory to assign timeslots in sequential order although the lowest timeslot must be entered in the lowest channel For example timeslots may be assigned 1 2 2 5 etc but not 1 5 2 2 H 2 Configuring the Modem for Drop and Insert Several dependencies exist when configuring the modem for Drop and Insert D amp I The following paragraphs explain these dependencies and provide the user with the information required to ensure smooth transition into D amp I and to min
105. IBS Prompt Alarm ASI IBS Prompt Alarm AS1 IBS Prompt Alarm AS1 IBS Prompt Alarm AS1 2 IBS Prompt Service Alarm AS1 2 IBS Prompt Service Alarm AS1 2 IBS Prompt Service Alarm AS1 2 IBS Prompt Service Alarm AS2 IBS Service Alarm Action to Terrestrial Across Interface H AH 1 in Bit 3 of NFAS TSO Yellow Alarm AH 1 in Bit 3 of NFAS TSO Yellow Alarm AH 1 in Bit 3 of NFAS TSO Yellow Alarm AH 1 in Bit 3 of NFAS TSO Yellow Alarm AH 1 in Bit 3 of NFAS TSO Yellow Alarm 3 AIS in TSs 1111 in 516 3 AIS in TSs 1111 in 516 3 AIS in TSs 1111 in 516 3 AIS in TSs 1111 in 516 AH 1 in Bit 3 of NFAS TSO Yellow Alarm Action to Satellite Across Interface D ADI AIS in Relevant TSs AD3 1111 in RelevantTS 16 s ADI AIS in Relevant TSs AD3 1111 in Relevant TS16 s ADI AIS in Relevant TSs AD2 1 in Bit 3 of Byte 32 AD2 1 in Bit 3 of Byte 32 AD2 1 in Bit 3 of Byte 32 AD2 1 in Bit 3 of Byte 32 AD2 1 in Bit 3 of Byte 32 6 7 DMD50 Univeral Satellite Modem Maintenance and Troubleshooting Notes MN DMD50 Revision 3 6 8 Chapter 7 7 1 7 2 Data Rates BPSK Uncoded 1 2 Rate BPSK 3 4 Rate BPSK
106. Link Level Protocol or SNMP Ethernet include control of the modems features plus software maintenance Additionally the two kne backlit LCD can be supplemented with terminal software running on a PC or laptop The modem now presents its entire monitor and control functions on the big screen Supported by Radyne s extensive line of redundancy switches converters encoders and decoders the 2 can be built into any satellite requirement Compatabelty with current modems such as Radyne s DMD2401 and DMD15 are maintained for seamless substitubon and addition to your existing systems Highlights Options BPSK QPSKIOQPSK BPSK16QAM Operation Hardware Options Software Options Inciude 24 Kbps to 20 Mbps 1bps Steps FEC Viterbi Reed Solomon Sequential Trelis Turbo Product e Data Rate Upgrades Configuration Monitor amp Control Features Fully User Programmable G703 nterface L Band Operation Excellent Spurious Performance 7 interface 85 Fully Compkant with IESS 308 309 310 314 315 Ethernet 10 100 Base T 8PSK DVB to EN301 210 and EN300 421 High Stability Reference SE B a 160AM Web Browser Capabilities DVB ASVSPI Interface Drop and insert industry standard Universal interface Module HSS interface DVB Fast Acquisition e Sequential Codi 50 to 90 MHz and 100 to 180 MHz IF and 950 to 2050 MHz L Band in 1 Hz DC input Po
107. M LDPC 2 3 0 3584 1 1468 1 1468 QPSK LDPC 3 4 0 47785 0 6734 0 6734 QPSK LDPC 1 2 0 7168 0 5184 0 7168 Based on this analysis QPSK LDPC 2 3 with Carrier in Carrier provides the maximum savings of 40 In addition to 40 reduction in Leased Bandwidth using Carrier in Carrier also reduced the required HPA Power by almost 40 Traditional Link CnC Link MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 32 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 14 9 2 Asymmetric Data Rate Link As occupied or allocated bandwidth of a Carrier in Carrier circuit is dictated by the larger of the two carriers it is strongly recommended that the smaller carrier be spread as much as possible using a lower order modulation and or FEC while meeting the PSD ratio spec Spreading the smaller carrier using a lower order modulation has multiple benefits e Lower order modulation is always more robust Lower order modulation uses less transponder power this reduces total transponder and increases available link margin Lower order modulation uses less transmit power on the ground this can significantly reduce the BUC SSPA size by not only reducing the transmit EIRP but also reducing BUC SSPA backoff Consider the following example Satellite amp Transponder IS 901 3422 W 22 22 EH EH Earth Station 1 Africa 4 5 m Earth Station 2 Africa 3 0 m 3000 Mbps 1000 Mbps While the traditional link was based on QPSK TP
108. MN DMD50 Notes Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter provides an overview of the DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem When describing the equipment it may be referred to as the modem or the unit 1 1 Overview The Radyne Universal Satellite Modem Figure 1 1 offers the best features of a sophisticated programmable IBS IDR and Closed Network Modem at an affordable price TRANDMITON wm MONAL LOCK POWER ALARM mELMAJORALARM FALET wm MNORALAEM WmOMNOR ALARM EVENT mu TEST MODE um TEST MODE um REMOTE Figure 1 1 Universal Satellite Modem Front Panel This versatile equipment package combines unsurpassed performance with numerous user friendly Front Panel Programmable Functions The unit provides selectable functions for different services Intelsat and IBS as well as closed networks of the configuration and Monitor and Control M amp C Functions are available at the Front Panel Operating parameters such as variable data rates FEC Code Rate modulation type IF Frequencies IBS IDR Framing and interface type can be readily set and changed at the Front Panel by earth station operations personnel The modem operates at all standard IBS and IDR Data Rates up to 8 448 Mbps Selection of any data rate is provided over the range of 2 4 Kbps to 52 Mbps in 1 bps steps For applications requiring system redundanc
109. Name OUTCLK Direction OUTCLK CLK CLK SYNC SYNC VALID VALID Pin Number Signal Name Direction Input Input Input 16 D7 Input pT D6 Input Input Input Input Input Input Input 8 D Input Input 9 D Input Input Input 23 Input Input Input Input Input MN DMD50 Revision 3 DO DO Di D1 D2 D2 D3 D3 D4 D4 D5 D5 D6 D6 D7 D7 Cable Shield DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces 5 13 4 DVB M2P OUT J4 The DVB or M2P OUT Port J4 is also supported on the DB 25 Female Connector It complies with RS 422 Electrical Specifications Refer to Table 5 15 for DVB and Table 5 16 for M2P pinouts for this connector Table 5 15 J3 DVB Out 25 Pin Female Table 5 16 J3 M2P Out 25 Pin D Sub Connector Female D Sub Connector Pin Number Signal Name_ Direction Pin Number Signal Name Direction Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output MN DMD50 Revision 3 5 17 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces 5 14 Ethernet Data Interface Optional The optional DMD50 Ethernet Data Interface provides four RJ 45 Auto Crossover Auto Sensing 10 100 Ethernet Data Ports where JS1 is Port 1
110. OCK When running Drop Mode indicates that the framing unit is unable to find the exported terrestrial framing pattern TX DVB FRAME Indicates that the Tx Input Data Stream Framing does not match the user selected Tx Terr Framing Incorrect Tx Terr Framing selected Incorrectly framed Tx Input Data Stream 6 2 1 4 Minor Rx Alarms Alarm Possible Cause BUFF UNDERFLOW Indicates that a Doppler Buffer underflow has occurred BUFF NEAR EMPTY Indicates that the Doppler Buffer is about to underflow BUFF NEAR FULL Indicates that the Doppler Buffer is about to overflow BUFFOVERFLOW Indicates that a Doppler Buffer overflow has occurred RX DATA Indicates that there is no Rx Data activity For the Ethernet Interface indicates ACTIVITY that no Ethernet port is active no cable is plugged in SAT AIS Indicates that AIS has been detected in the receive satellite data stream MN DMD50 Revision 3 6 3 DMD50 Univeral Satellite Modem Maintenance and Troubleshooting Alarm Possible Cause DnI FRAME LOCK Indicates if drop insert data is frame locked i T ESME Indicates if drop insert data has multiframe lock INSERT CRC Indicates if the Circular Redundancy Check is passing in PCM 30C and PCM 31C Modes T1 E1 SIGNALING Indicates that the T1 E1 Signal is not locked IFEC LOCK Indicates that the Inner Codec is not locked OFEC LOCK Indicates that the Reed Solomon
111. Reed Solomon Synchronous Figure 3 9 Reed Solomon Decoder Functional Block Diagram Table 3 1 Reed Solomon Codes Data Rate R S Code Dono iC Interleaving Maximum R S Kbps n k Depth Codec Delay ms 1 126 112 7 126 112 7 126 112 7 126 112 7 126 112 7 126 112 7 Type of Service Small IDR With 16 15 O H MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 16 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation ome o 03 1536 126 112 7 0 125 225 205 10 219 201 9 194 178 8 194 178 8 219 201 9 219 201 9 219 201 9 219 201 9 204 188 8 1 n code length k information symbols and t symbol error correcting capability 2 Design objective AR IDR With 96 Kbps O H AAAA 3 10 Asynchronous Overhead Operation Framing Multiplexer Capability The Asynchronous Framing Multiplexer is capable of multiplexing a relatively low speed overhead channel onto the terrestrial data stream resulting in a slightly higher combined or aggregate data rate through the modem The overhead channel is recovered at the far end This added channel is termed variously An Overhead Channel Service Channel Async Channel or in IESS terminology an ES to ES Data Channel The basic frame structure used by the multiplexer is that specified in the IESS 309 Standard resulting in a 16 15 Aggregate ratio of ove
112. SCBWI 2 Backward Alarm In 4 ESCBWI 4 No Connection NC No Connection NC Backward Alarm Out 1 C ESCBWO 1C Backward Alarm Out 1 NC ESCBWO Backward Alarm Out 2 ESCBWO 2C Backward Alarm Out 2 NC ESCBWO 2NC Backward Alarm Out 3 C ESCBWO 3C Backward Alarm Out 3 NC ESCBWO 3NC Backward Alarm Out 4 ESCBWO 4C Backward Alarm Out 4 NC ESCBWO 4NC Backward Alarm In 1 ESCBWI 1 Backward Alarm In 3 ESCBWI 3 No Connection NC MN DMD50 Revision 3 No Connection NC DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces 5 15 5 SD DDD J6 The Send Data Drop Data In Port Unbalanced is a 75 Ohm Female BNC Connector 5 15 6 DDO J7 The Drop Data Out Port Unbalanced is a 75 Ohm Female BNC Connector 5 15 7 IDI J8 The Insert Data In Port Unbalanced is a 75 Ohm Female BNC Connector 5 15 8 SD IDO J9 The Send Data Insert Data Out Port Unbalanced is 75 Ohm Female BNC Connector 5 16 HSSI Ethernet J1 The HSSI High Speed Serial Interface J1 complies with the HSSI Functional and Electrical Specifications The physical interface is a 50 Pin SCSI 2 Type Connector Electrical levels are ECL Gapped clocking not supported The pinouts for this interface are listed in Table 5 23 Table 5 23 J1 HSSI High Speed Serial Interface 50 Pin Connector m
113. SWITCH INTERFACE 15 th ised ab 5 11 5 9 2 MC Cm 5 13 5 9 3 5 13 5 9 4 5 13 5 9 5 5 9 pU 5 13 5 10 Ethernet Data Interface Optional cssssccsssscsssssesssscssssccssccsssssssssessssesssssccsssssesescssseecs 5 13 5 11 High Speed Serial Interface HSSI Optional scssssccsssscsssssesssscssssscsssscssesssssecsssssees 5 14 LM PAM NERONE TTD EDDA 5 14 vi Table of Contents Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem MN DMD50 5 13 ASI DVB M2P Interface Optional sccssccsscscssssscssscssscescsssscssscscessessscesscesssssseesseseees 5 15 DPS TAS TUNED D dehet tet a mde 5 15 3 1325 INST OUT T te 5 15 5 13 3 TOV B M2P IN heene tet ot tes e tette isi tete 5 15 SABA DVB M2P OUT I fhirein toe eee dete eerte te eere bor 5 17 5 14 Ethernet Data Interface Optional 4 eese e ee eee eee eene eene eene esee te etos 5 18 5 15 HSS G M3 e 5 18 5 151 GIRAUDO ken e E T BE AOE IE OER 5 19 5152 EAI T TEO ee ete ATE eee 5 20 5153 BAL TIe ee EEE REEERE 5 20 5 154 ESCALARM J kemenna a a 5 21 OG ara
114. Terminal Mode Control The modem can be interactively monitored and controlled in the Terminal Mode with a full screen presentation of current settings and status The Terminal Control Mode supports several baud rates however the connection must be set for 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity 8 N 1 Modem Setup for Terminal Mode Terminal Mode Communications and Protocol is set from the Front Panel Control by setting the Control Mode Parameter to Terminal and then setting the Modem Port Term Baud and Emulation Parameters as desired Then a terminal is connected to Connector J20 on the Back Panel All operating software for the Terminal Mode is contained within the Modem Internal Control Software A break signal on the communications line pressing ESC on the terminal or Power On of the modem will initiate full screen terminal mode printing and redraw the full screen The Terminal Mode displays the present status of all user parameters controlled and read by the processor and offers a menu allowing change to any controlled parameter The Terminal Mode uses eight Screens each of which have the basic contents of the three modem monitor and control areas as set in the Front Panel matrix columns This screen is used for setting the parameters of the Modulator Demodulator Event Alarm Latched Alarm Drop Controls Insert Controls and Interface Areas Terminal Port User Interface The Remote Po
115. The remote modem has a receive E N of 7 5 dB The local modem has been set with a Target of 7 5 dB and has a current power output of 15 dBm It begins to rain at the local site and E N drops to 7 0 then 6 8 dB The local modem is constantly sending update messages of its E N to the remote modem When the remote modem sees the drop in the E N it slowly begins to raise it s output power and will continue to so until the Target E N is restored at the local site When the rain diminishes the local modem s E N will begin to increase The remote modem will now lower its power level to restore the target value The operation is therefore a feedback control loop with the added complication of a significant time delay Near Side AUPC Near Side AUPC is a loop back system that adjusts the broadcast uplink signal when local conditions change This is done by having the Near Side AUPC attempt to adjust the outbound power to compensate for local weather The local receiver must be tuned and locked to the transmitter and then the internal EUN is used for feedback This creates a Tx Satellite Rx control loop Near Side AUPC is primarily used for broadcast applications since the modem cannot expect to receive data from a distant location Near Side AUPC can be utilized with any satellite framing or Network mode MN DMD50 Revision 3 G 2 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Strap Codes There are safeguards built int
116. ad 14 APPENDIX J ETHERNET DATA INTERFACE J 1 J 1 Configuring the modem to use the Ethernet Data Interface Optional J 1 AI Ethernet blow Control de cobs eas alba eee eee he ead J 1 J 1 1 1 Flow Control eite eerte t e ptite eres J 2 J 1 1 2 Full Duplex Flow Control i a E J 2 J 1 2 Ethernet Daisy Chaini eee ie eee beet to ee E EEUU Hebe ol Haa ett Pda 1 2 113 Ethernet QOS Type tte EUR Deere eiit Hs J 2 LLA EthernetQOS Queues Uer eee eee ce obits J 2 J 1 5 Setting Up The DMD20 DMD20 LBST Ethernet Bridge To Operate Like A FIFO J 3 J 1 6 Packet Statistics c r o n Receipt C E E ete tote t be o oe e Perte J 4 Xi Table of Contents Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem MN DMD50 Notes xii PREFACE About this Manual This manual describes the installation and operation for the Radyne 50 This is a technical document intended for earth station engineers technicians and operators responsible for the operation and maintenance of the DMD50 Reporting Comments or Suggestions Concerning this Manual Comments and suggestions regarding the content and design of this manual will be appreciated To submit comments please contact
117. al Clock The time and date is kept in order to time tag system events User can change the Internal Clock via the front panel Web Browser or Terminal ports MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 7 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 6 Loopback Features Terrestrial amp IF The modem provides for a number of different loopbacks The Loopback supported are IF Loopback Tx IF port is looped back to the Rx IF port Terrestrial Loopback Tx Data port is looped back to the Rx Data port after the interface driver receiver prior to the framing unit Baseband Loopback Tx Data port is looped back to the Rx Data port after the interface driver receiver after the fraiming unit RX Terrestrail Loopback Receive Data from the satellite is looped back for retransmission to the satellite providing a far end loopback prior to the framing unit Baseband Loopback Receive Data from the satellite is looped back for retransmission to the satellite providing a far end loopback after to framing unit TX RX Terrestrial Loopback provides both Terrestrail loopbacks simultaneously Baseband Loopback provides both Baseband loopbacks simultaneously Usage of the modems loopback capabilities in conjunction with the Ethernet data interface can produce undersirable network loops In order to run any type of data test with an Ethernet interface you must utilize two modems connected back to back Simply u
118. al Satellite Modem Front Panel Upgrade Procedure INSTALLED indicates that the option is already available as part of the modems feature set HW amp KEY REQ indicates that additional hardware is required to support the option Contact your Radyne sales representative for more information regarding the required hardware upgrade KEY CODE REQ indicates that the desired option can be enabled as a demonstration from the front panel 2 Contact Radyne with the Unit ID and Request a Demonstration The modem s Unit ID can be found on the front panel as follows From the modem s Main Menu scroll right to the SYSTEM Menu Scroll down Scroll right to the HW FW CONFIG Menu Scroll down Scroll right to the FEATURES Menu Scroll down The value displayed on top line of this menu is 12 digit Unit ID It is displayed as on front panel of the modem as 3 sets of 4 digits in a dot delineated format as follows 1234 1234 1234 Your Radyne sales representative will ask you for this number along with the features you wish to demo 3 Once your order has been processed you will be issued a 12 digit demonstration code This code can only be used one time and it is only good on the modem for which it was originally requested To enter this code from the front panel perform the following From the modem s Main Menu scroll right to the SYSTEM Menu Scroll down Scroll right to the HW FW CONFIG Menu
119. an Enhanced Multiplexer Mode has been implemented that can be engaged under software control Since this mode changes the use of many of the framed non data bits this mode is only usable when the DMD50 is at both ends of a link In this mode the overhead signaling bytes 16 and 48 can be used to implement a significantly higher speed ES to ES Data Channel under software control When implemented this rate is 16 times that of the normal IBS standard or 1 30 of the terrestrial data rate 1 32 of the aggregate rate The IBS Async mode MUST be selected for true Asynchronous channel operation to be available 3 13 ESC Backward Alarms When running in IDR Mode and if the modem has the ESC Option there will be four Backward Alarms available for use by the earth stations at each end of the link both ends must have the ESC option These alarms are accessed via the ESC ALARMS Port The four alarms are controlled by four relays each having a normally open normally closed and a common connection The common connections of these relays referred to as Backward Alarm Inputs can be connected to whichever system on the earth station that the user wishes to trigger the backward alarm When ground is applied to the Common Input Connection of one of these relays that relay and associated backward alarm will then be in a no fault state When the ground is removed the relay and the associated Tx Backward Alarm will toggle to the faul
120. applications INPUT THRESHOLD dBm 30 to 90 dbm EB NO ALARM DATA menu DATA RATE bps SYMB RATE sps INNER FEC TPC INTERLEAVER MN DMD50 Revision 3 Allows the user to adjust the low level threshold limit for input power Input power level below the threshold limit will trigger a major alarm on the demodulator 0 0 to 9 90 db Allows the user to set the desired EYN for the local receiver This setting is compared against the receive E N and commands to the remote modem to increase or decrease Transmit Power accordingly are sent Refer to Technical Specs for Data Rates Allows the user to set the Data Rate in bps steps via the Front Panel Arrows or Keypad Allows the user to view the Symbol Rate Viterbi 1 2 3 4 7 8 None Optional FEC Rates Sequential 1 2 3 4 7 8 Trellis 8PSK Turbo lt 20Mbps 793 495 3 4 7 8 Turbo gt 20Mbps 750 875 CSC 3 4 DVB VIT 2 3 5 6 DVB Trellis 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 9 LDPC B O QPSK 1 2 2 3 3 4 LDPC 8PSK 2 3 3 4 LDPC 8QAM 2 3 3 4 LDPC QPSK OQPSK 1 2 2 3 3 4 LDPC 160AM 3 4 Allows the user to select the Rx Code Rate and Type DISABLED ENABLED DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem DIFF CODING SCRAMBLER SEL SCRAMBLER CTRL SAT FRAMING IN BAND RATE SCC CTL RATIO SCC INBAND RATE TERR FRAMING DATA POLARITY SYMBOL PAIR ESC OVERHEAD MN DMD50 Revision 3 User Interfaces Allows the user t
121. aragraphs give examples of typical configurations that could use the ROM Maps as templates The ROM Map used would have to be first copied to the appropriate Active Transmit Drop and or Active Receive Insert Map s before it could be used To use a MN DMD50 Revision 3 H 16 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Drop and Insert D amp I modification of a ROM Map the ROM Map must first be copied to the appropriate Edit Map then modified and then copied to the appropriate Active Map The mapping of channels to time slots is arbitrary it is not necessary to map to 51 CH2 to TS2 etc The channel to the time slot mapping may be in any order within the constraints of the number of available channels For example ROM Map 1 could be used as the template for an Active Transmit Drop Map within a modulator configured for 64 Kbps operation Only the first time slot of the T1 or E1 frame would be dropped into the modulator transmit path The Drop Multiplexer would know to look only at the first entry in the Active Transmit table and would ignore the other 29 entries If the map contained an 8 in its first entry the eighth channel of the T1 E1 frame would be sent to the modulator ROM Map 2 could be used as the template for an Active Receive Insert Map within a demodulator configured for 128 Kbps operation The demodulated data in the receive path would be inserted into the first two time slots of the T1 or E1 frame The Insert Mu
122. arameters change the boot mode to NON VOL IPMASK 255 255 255 000 MODEM IP ADDR 192 168 000 238 SERVER IP ADDR 192 168 000 101 ROUTER IP ADDR 192 168 000 102 IMPORTANT The DMD50 is shipped from the factory with the Boot Mode configured as Default Verify that the Boot Mode is set for Default To access the unit via the Ethernet port set the selection to IP TEST This will set the IP parameter to an accessible address If user wants to utilize an alternate address user must set the selection to NON VOL As an example we will use a new modem IP address of 172 018 100 205 for the remaining of the TCP IP setup procedure Contact the IT manager for proper guidance to ensure setup is successful 2 BOOT SERVER TAG This allows for the selection of the operating boot tag when operating in the BOOTp Mode The default setting of 206 is automatically selected when the boot mode is set to DEFAULT factory preset mode 3 MODEM HOST This displays the unit Host name that is operating such as DMD20 This is a read only display 4 IP ADDR MASK This will allow for the entry of the IP Address Mask This will need to be entered based on the Network settings Refer to your IP Administrator if you do not know this address for the correct address setting Example IP Address Mask setting 255 255 000 000 5 MODEM IP ADDR This will allow for the entry of the Modem s individual network IP Address Each device on the network will have a uni
123. are per the IBS standard The bits of Overhead Housekeeping byte 32 are implemented as shown in Table 3 3 below Table 3 3 Bits of Overhead Housekeeping Bit 1 ES to ES Data This bit is routed directly to the ES to ES Data Channel Channel Its data rate is 1 512 of the aggregate rate or 1 480 of the through terrestrial data rate and is normally used to super sample an asynchronous data channel Bit 2 Frame Alignment Part of the Frame Alignment word Bit 3 Backward Alarm Transmit and Receive with main processor to activate Main Alarm LED MN DMD50 Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation Bit 4 Multiframe Message As per IBS Bits 5 and 6 Spare Not currently utilized Bits 7 and 8 Encryption Not currently utilized Utilization 3 12 The ratio of the Through Terrestrial Data Channel Rate to the aggregate rate is 15 16 The standard transmit and receive channels of the ES to ES Data Channel in Standard IBS Mode are raw channels operating at the specific bit rate as controlled by the data channel rate without buffering In addition no clocks are provided with this channel Since it would be rare that the data rate provided was exactly that required for a standard rate device the only method of communicating using this channel is to allow it to super sample the user data Asynchronous Multiplexer Mode Since many of the frame bits in the standard IBS mode are not used
124. arth must be ensured and that the equipment shall be connected to the protective earth connection at all times Therefore it is imperative during installation configuration and operation that the user ensures that the unit has been properly grounded using the ground stud provided on the rear panel of the unit In Finland Laite on liitett v suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan In Norway Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt In Sweden Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag MN DMD50 Revision 3 2 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Installation 2 4 Initial Configuration Check The is shipped from the factory with preset factory defaults Upon initial power up a user check should be performed to verify the shipped modem configuration Refer to Section 4 User Interfaces to locate and verify that the following configuration settings are correct IMPORTANT Transmit Tx and Receive Rx Interface types are dependent upon the customer s order IMPORTANT Implementing Strap Code 26 can set the following modem configuration Refer to Table D 1 for an explanation and tabular listing of available Strap Codes The Frequency and Modulator Output Power are set independently of the strap code Standard Factory Configuration Settings Modulator Data Rate 2 048 Mbps Mode Closed Network Satellite Framing None Scrambler V 35 IESS Drop and Insert Disabled Inner FEC 1 2 Ra
125. ary If the above steps were followed and the information was entered then the following would be the TCP IP configuration summary for a no router specified setup 1 Boot Mode NON VOL 2 Bootp Server Tag 206 3 Modem Host DMD20 4 IP Address Mask 255 255 0 0 5 Modem IP Address 172 18 100 215 6 Server IP Address 172 18 4 250 7 Router IP Address 010 000 001 001 8 Modem Ethernet Address 0010650903EB 9 Ethernet Rate 10 MBPS HD F 4 Ethernet Test Connecting the Modem Ethernet Cable to a Network Link 1 Connect the Network Switch Hub to the Modem Ethernet port J9 using standard RJ 45 to RJ 45 10BaseT CAT 5 Cables as shown below FAD STRAIGHT caBte lonb 20 BIEN 2 E Ej NETWORK SWITCH HUB NETWORK TYPE CONNECTION DMD20 Ethernet Network Connection MN DMD50O Revision 3 F 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem TCP IP Ethernet Setup Connecting the Modem Ethernet Cable Directly to a Computer without a Network The user can directly connect to the equipment without connecting to a network This will often occur at remote sites where a network is not available To connect the user will need an Ethernet Crossover Null cable The pinout for this cable is as follows RJ45 Connector A RJ45 Connector B Pin 1 Pin 3 Pin 2 Pin 6 Pin 3 Pin 1 Pin 4 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 5 Pin 6 Pin 2 Pin 7 Pin 7 Pin 8 Pin 8 ETHERNET
126. as EXT BNC The External Clock is often used as the station master clock The RX Clock selection can be accessed in the INTERFACE RX SETUP menu The clock frequency EXT FREQ can be selected in the Interface General Menu Clock specification Frequency 1 MHz to 20 MHz Level 0 3 Vp p to 5 Vp p Sine or Square wave MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 13 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 7 2 5 EXT IDI Insert Data In 3 7 3 External IDI is used only for E1 T1 Drop and Insert applications The available T1 E1 Frame Source selections are External Internal and IDI DDO Loopback The T1 E1 Frame Source selections can be accessed in the INTERFACE RX SETUP menus If Ext IDI is selected as the RX Buffer clock then user must first specify T1 E1 Frame Source External RX Buffer Clock recovered from the data Internal RX Buffer Clock recoverd from the internal clock IDI DDO Loopback RX Buffer Clock recoverd from the data and looped back EXT REF External Reference Top BNC Port J10 This is not actually a clock but does have some clocking implications When the external reference is used the master oscillator within the modem is locked to the external reference and the internal accuracy and stability of the unit assumes that of the External Reference Therefore not only are the transmit frequencies locked to the external reference but the modem s internal SCT Oscillator is locked to the external reference as well
127. as well as Turbo Codec and Sequential Codec Outer Code This option must be installed at the factory and may require other options Customized Options The modem may be customized for specific customer requirements Most modifications or customization can be accomplished by means of firmware software modifications The following are examples of the types of customization available to the user Customized Data Rates Customized Scrambler Descramblers Customized Overhead Framing Structures Customized Modulation Formats Customized Uses for the ES ES Overhead Channel Contact the CEFD Customer Service or Sales Department at 480 333 4357 for all requests MN DMD50 Revision 2 Appendix Front Panel Upgrade Procedure B 1 Introduction The Universal Satellite Modem offers the ability to perform field upgrades of the modem s feature set quickly and easily from the front panel Purchased upgrades will become part of the modems permanent configuration Demonstration upgrades will enable the optional features for a 30 day evaluation period B 2 Required Equipment The Universal Satellite Modem is the only equipment required for this procedure B 3 Upgrade Procedure The following paragraphs describe the procedure for permanently updating the feature set of the Universal Satellite Modem 1 The following steps allow users to quickly determine from the front panel whether or not the desired feature s are supported by the hard
128. ates 0 495 0 793 LDPC TPC Optional BPSK 1 2 lt 20Mbps LDPC QPSK OQPSK 1 2 2 3 3 4 lt 20Mbps LDPC 8PSK 8QAM 2 3 3 4 lt 20Mbps LDPC 16QAM 3 4 lt 20Mbps LDPC 7 2 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Decoder Options Descrambler Acquisition Range Reacquisition Range Sweep Delay Value 7 4 Plesiochronous Buffer Size Centering Centering Modes Clock 7 5 Monitor and Control Technical Specifications BPSK 21 44 TPC QPSK OQPSK 1 2 2 3 3 4 7 8 lt 20Mbps TPC 8QAM SPSK 2 3 3 4 7 8 lt 20Mbps TPC 16QAM 3 4 7 8 20Mbps TPC Reed Solomon INTELSAT DVB Optional Custom N K Reed Solomon OM 73 CCITT V 35 or IBS Programmable 1 kHz to 255 kHz Programmable 1 Hz to 25000 Hz 0 to 6000 seconds in 100 msec Steps msec to 64 msec Automatic on Underflow Overflow IBS Integral Number of Frames IDR Integral Number of Multi Frames Transmit External Rx Recovered or SCT Internal Ethernet 10 Base T Web Browser Remote RS 485 Terminal RS 232 DMD15 Protocol Compatible 7 6 DMD50 Drop and Insert Optional Terrestrial Data Line Coding Framing Time Slot Selection Time Slots Data Rates Efficient D amp I Time Slots 7 7 Terrestrial Interfaces 1 544 Mbps or 2 048 Mbps G 732 733 AMI or B8ZS for and HDB3 for D4 ESF and PCM 30 PCM 30C or PCM 31 PCM 31C for E1 n x 64 Contiguous or Arbitrary Blocks for Drop or Insert 151 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15 16 2
129. ates no Tx Data activity TX TERR AIS Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates that AIS has been detected in the Tx Data Stream DnI FRAME LOCK Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates the framing unit is unable to find the expected terrestrial framing pattern DnI M FRAME LOCK Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates the framing unit is unable to find the expected inter frame pattern TX DVB FRM LOCK Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates that Tx input data stream framing does not match the user selected TX TERR FRAMING RX MAJOR menu FPGA CFG Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates a receive FPGA hardware failure DSP CFG Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates a receive DSP failure SIGNAL LOCK Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates that the demod is unable to lock to a signal INPUT LVL THRESH Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates Rx signal level has fallen below input threshold FRAME LOCK Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates that the Framing Unit is unable to find the expected framing pattern MULTIFRAME LOCK Pass Fail Unmasked Masked LB SYNTH PLL MN DMD50 Revision 3 This alarm will flash on during certain modem parameter changes A solid indication points toward a problem with the incoming clock to the modem SCTE Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates that the Rx L Band Synthesizer is not locked This alarm will flash on during certain modem parameter changes solid indication points toward a configuration pro
130. ator LED Indicators data including FEC Sync Indicates that a condition or event has occurred that the modem has stored in memory The events may be viewed from the Front Panel or in the Terminal Mode Indicates that the unit is in the process of updating firmware with FTP or flashing indicates some features are demo Indicates that the receiver locked to an incoming carrier and MN DMD50 Revision 3 4 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces Major Alarm Red Indicates that the Receive Direction has failed losing traffic Minor Alarm Yellow Indicates that a Receive Warning Condition exists Test Mode Indicates that the receiver is involved in a current Test Mode activity 4 3 4 4 4 4 1 Parameter Setup The four Cursor Control Arrow Keys are used to navigate the menu tree and select the parameter to be set After arriving at a parameter that needs to be modified depress lt ENTER gt The first space of the modifiable parameter highlights blinks and is ready for a new parameter to be entered After entering the new parameter using the keypad Refer to Figure 4 2 depress lt ENTER gt to lock in the new parameter If a change needs to be made prior to pressing ENTER depress CLEAR and the display defaults back to the original parameter Depress ENTER again and re enter the new parameters followed by ENTER Figure 4 2 Entering New Parameters Following a valid input the
131. ber of channels are determined by the data rate The terrestrial time slots available are determined by the drop mode When the user has finished editing the Tx Edit map it must be copied to the Tx Act map before it will be used by the modem NORMAL INVERTED 4 19 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem DROP amp INSERT menu INSERT MODE T1 E1 FRAME SRC TERR STREAMING ESC CHAN 1 dB ESC CHAN 2 dB GENERAL menu EXT FREQ MHz REF FREQ SRC REF FREQ MHz TX ASYNC MODE menu TX ASYNC MODE ES INTERFACE MN DMD50 Revision 3 User Interfaces Allows the user to select the Buffer Clock Polarity for the Tx Terrestrial Clock relative to the Tx Data If G 703 Interface is selected this selection cannot be changed NONE 1 04 T1 ESF PCM 30 PCM 30C PCM 31 PCM 31C T1 D4 S T1 ESF S Allows the user to select any of the above INTERNAL EXTERNAL Selects the frame source for T1 or E1 framing BYTE OUTPUT PACKET OUTPUT ASI only Byte output continuous Packet output burst 20 to 10 dB Allows user to select ESC Voice Channel Gain Only displayed when IDR NETWORK and VOICE Channel are selected 20 to 10 dB Allows user to select ESC Voice Channel Gain Only displayed when IDR NETWORK and VOICE Channel are selected Variable Through Data Rate Allows the user to select the external clock frequency in MHz INTERNAL EXTERNAL HIGH STABILITY Allows the user to select t
132. bility to use them either separate from or in combination with any other equipment or products A fixed charge established for each product will be imposed for all equipment returned for warranty repair where Comtech EF Data Corporation cannot identify the cause of the reported failure Exclusive Remedies Comtech EF Data Corporation s warranty as stated is in lieu of all other warranties expressed implied or statutory including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose The buyer shall pass on to any purchaser lessee or other user of Comtech EF Data Corporation s products the aforementioned warranty and shall indemnify and hold harmless Comtech EF Data Corporation from any claims or liability of such purchaser lessee or user based upon allegations that the buyer its agents or employees have made additional warranties or representations as to product preference or use The remedies provided herein are the buyer s sole and exclusive remedies Comtech EF Data shall not be liable for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract tort or any other legal theory viii DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Revision 3 Preface MN DMD50 Customer Support Refer to p xxiv for information regarding this product s Warranty Policy IMPORTANT Contact the Comtech EF Data Customer Support Department for e Product support or training e Reporting comments or suggestions
133. bit impairments when any of these become too great In addition CnC operates in an environment where e Carriers intentionally occupy the same spectral slot e Performance depends upon desired and co located interfering carrier MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 23 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 14 3 Operational Recommendations The rules for CnC operation are summarized below Both earth stations share the same footprint so each sees both carriers CnC carriers are operated in pairs One outbound with multiple return carriers is not allowed Asymmetric data rates are allowed no restrictions The ratio of power spectral density is normally less than 11 dB CnC operates with modems not modulators only or demodulators only In addition to minimize false acquisition observe the following Use of IESS 315 V 35 Scrambler is highly recommended Keep the search delay range as narrow as possible once the modem has reported the search delay narrow the search delay range to the nominal reported value 5 ms for example if the modem reported delay is 245 ms narrow the search range to say 240 250 ms Use external data source e g Firebird or internal BER tester when testing Carrier in Carrier performance To prevent self locking in case the desired carrier is lost it is recommended that the two carriers have some configuration difference for example use different settings for Spectrum In
134. ble parts or configuration settings located inside the Chassis There is a potential shock hazard internally at the power supply module DO NOT open the Chassis under any circumstances Before initially applying power to the unit it is a good idea to disconnect the transmit output from the operating ground station equipment This is especially true if the current configuration settings are unknown where incorrect settings could disrupt existing communications traffic A The unit contains a Lithium Battery WAKO REO CU RENTA exists if the battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries in accordance with local and national regulations MN DMD50 Revision 3 2 2 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Installation 2 3 Mounting Considerations The can be installed within any standard 19 inch equipment cabinet or rack The unit is a one rack unit RU mounting space 1 75 inches vertically and 19 inches of depth and requires a minimum rack depth of 22 inches for cabling The rear panel of the DMD50 is designed to have power enter from the left and IF Cabling enter from the right when viewed from the rear of the unit Data and control cabling can enter from either side based on data interface option The unit can be placed on a table or suitable surface if required When mounted in an equipment rack adequate ventilation must be provided The ambient tem
135. blem within the modem DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem IF SYNTH PLL ETHERNET WAN FORCED ALARM RX MINOR menu User Interfaces Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates that the Rx IF Synthesizer is not locked This alarm will flash on during certain modem parameter changes A solid indication points toward a configuration problem within the modem Indicates that the interface card is faulted and will not pass data displays only when the Ethernet Card is installed and the Ethernet Interface is selected DISABLED ENABLED Allows user to enable a forced Rx summary alarm BUFF UNDERFLOW Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates that a Doppler Buffer underflow has occurred BUFF NEAR EMPTY Pass Fail Unmasked Masked BUFF NEAR FULL Indicates that the Doppler Buffer is about to underflow Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates that the Doppler Buffer is about to overflow BUFF OVERFLOW Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates that a Doppler Buffer overflow has occurred RX DATA ACTIVITY Pass Fail Unmasked Masked SAT AIS DnI FRAME LOCK DnI M FRAME LOCK INSERT CRC T1 E1 SIGNALING IFEC LOCK OFEC LOCK MN DMD50 Revision 3 Indicates that there is no Rx Data activity Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates that AIS has been detected in the receive satellite data stream Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates if drop insert data is frame locked Pass Fail Unmasked Masked In
136. bo BER zm Typical 1E 3 82dB 4dB 28dB 37dB 1E4 4t1dB aBdB Table 7 11 8PSK BER Performance Turbo BER Table 7 12 16 QAM BER Performance Turbo BER Specification tries Table 7 13 B O QPSK BER Performance LDPC ee ee Table 7 13a BPSK BER Performance LDPC T MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 28 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications Table 7 14 8PSK 8 QAM Rate BER Performance LDPC pcc PSK tr 8 QAM 15698 c5 524 Table 7 16 Open Network Performance Specification Typical IBS IDR IBS IDR 1 2 Rate 3 4 Rate 3 4 Rate 3 4 Rate MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 29 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications 7 22 16 ACG Output Voltage The AGC Output Voltage is a function of the Input Power Level in dBm The AGC Output Voltage is found on the Alarm connector Pin 14 of J15 2 D 8 gt 5 B gt lt Input Level dBm Figure 7 13 AGC Voltage Monitor MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 30 A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 A 7 Appendix A Product Options Hardware Options The following enhanced interface cards are available G 703 IDR ESC Interface The modem can be equipped with either a G 703 T1 E1 T2 E2 IDR ESC Interface or G 703 T1 E1 T2 E2 TS ES STS1IDR ESC Internal High Stability The
137. c will not be allowed The following parameters cannot be changed while the unit is in the given mode of operation IDR IESS 308 For Data rates 1 544 2 048 6 312 8 448 Mbps Framing Type 96 Kbps IDR Descrambler type V 35 Spectrum Mask Intelsat For Data Rates 1 544 Mbps Framing Type 1 15 IBS Descrambler Type IESS 309 Spectrum Mask Intelsat IBS IESS 309 For Data Rates 2 048 Mbps Framing Type 1 15 IBS Descrambler Type IESS 309 Spectrum Mask Intelsat Drop amp Insert Data Rates 64 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15 16 20 24 30 Framing Type 1 15 IBS Descrambler Type IESS 309 Spectrum Mask Intelsat Efficient D amp I Closed Network Data Rates n x 64 1 31 Any combination Descrambler Type IESS 309 Spectrum Mask Intelsat DVB Per EN301 421 amp En301 210 Data Rates Rates Framing Type DVB Scrambler Type DVB Spectrum Mask DVB 0 25 0 35 Closed Net possible combinations allowed however DVB settings requires the DVB network spec Refer to Strap Code Guide Appendix D 4 12 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem IF menu FREQUENCY MHz SPECTRUM MODULATION SPECTRAL MASK SWEEP RANGE kHz SWEEP DELAY Sec REACQ RANGE Hz ADJ CARRIER PWR FAST ACQUISITION MN DMD50 Revision 3 User Interfaces The Strap Code is a quick set key that sets many modem parameters Consult the strap code guide for available strap codes
138. concerning manuals e Information on upgrading or returning a product A Customer Support representative may be reached at Comtech EF Data Attention Customer Support Department 2114 West 7th Street Tempe Arizona 85281 USA 480 333 2200 Main Comtech EF Data number 480 333 4357 Customer Support Desk 480 333 2161 FAX To return a Comtech EF Data product in warranty and out of warranty for repair or replacement e Contact the Comtech EF Data Customer Support Department Be prepared to supply the Customer Support representative with the model number serial number and a description of the problem e Request a Return Material Authorization RMA number from the Comtech EF Data Customer Support representative e the product in its original shipping carton packaging to ensure that the product is not damaged during shipping e Ship the product back to Comtech EF Data Shipping charges should be prepaid Online Customer Support An RMA number request can be requested electronically by contacting the Customer Support Department through the online support page at www comtechefdata com support asp Click on Return Material Authorization for detailed instructions on our return procedures e Click on the RMA Request Form hyperlink then fill out the form completely before sending e Send e mail to the Customer Support Department at service comtechefdata com DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Revision 3 Preface
139. converter frequency uncertainties and other drift associated with the electronics in the Radyne 50 itself The CnC module tracks and compensates for this frequency offset and drift 3 Atmospheric effects Fading and scintillation can affect amplitude phase and spectral composition of the signal and the degree to which it correlates with the original signal The CnC module tracks and compensates for these atmospheric related impairments MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 22 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 4 Link Asymmetries Various asymmetries in the forward and return link can produce differences in the relative power of the two received signal components These can be both deterministic static or random and time varying An example of the former would be the differences resulting from antenna size gain variations between the two ends of the link An example of the latter would be transient power differences due to different levels of atmospheric fading in the uplinks CnC compensates for the asymmetries up to a certain extent A B delayed and offset B Downlink A Uplink A Downlink DMD50 Modem Module Adaptive ac oes Modulator Demodulator DMD50 Modem Figure 3 10 Conceptual Block Diagram In a number of ways CnC carriers behave similar to conventional carriers in satellite links They are both exposed to adjacent carriers cross polarization and rain fade and exhi
140. copy of S1 to estimate the necessary parameters of scaling complex gain phase delay offset and frequency offset The algorithm continuously tracks changes in these parameters as they are generally time varying in a satellite link Interference Canceller Up Converter Adaptive Equalizer To Demodulator Composite Signal Input S4 S Modulator Output S or S2 Figure 3 15 Carrier in Carrier Signal Processing Block Diagram The resulting estimate of the unwanted interfering signal is then subtracted from the composite signal In practical applications the estimate of the unwanted signal can be extremely accurate Unwanted interfering signal suppression of 30 dB or more has been achieved in commercial products with minimal degradation of the demodulator performance MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 28 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 14 6 Margin Requirements Typical interfering signal cancellation is 28 to 35 dB depending on the product The residual interfering signal appears as noise causing a slight degradation of the Eb No To compensate for the residual noise a small amount of additional link margin is required to maintain the BER Margin requirements depend on the product modulation and power ratios For Radyne DMDS0 the additional margin requirements are as follows Mesto Nominal Margin Equal power and equal symbol rate BPSK 0 3 dB for the interfering carrier and th
141. corrects the leftover errors in each block The data is then descrambled and output from the R S Section MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 15 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 9 2 Reed Solomon Code Rate The R S Code Rate is defined by N K where N is the total R S block size in bytes data check bytes and K is the number of data bytes input into the R S Encoder The transmission rate expansion required by the R S Codec is then defined by N K The modem automatically sets the correct R S code rate for IDR IBS open network operation in accordance with the data shown in Table 3 1 The modem allows the following N and K setting 126 112 219 201 194 178 225 205 Variable Reed Solomon rates are available on the optional AS 5167 Super Card Refer to Appendix A for further information 3 9 3 Interleaving Iinterleaving depths of 4 8 or 12 R S blocks are allowed This allows burst errors to be spread over multiple blocks in order to enhance the error correcting performance of the R S Codec For Intelsat Network Modes the interleaving depth is automatically set to 4 for QPSK or BPSK or 8 for 8PSK In Closed Network Mode the interleaver depth can be manually set to 4 or 8 and in DVB Network Mode the interleaver depth is automatically set to 12 Unique Synchronous Reed Solomon Interleaver Word To Modulator Scrambler Encoder Insertion Figure 3 8 Reed Solomon Encoder Functional Block Diagram Unique Word n
142. ctor Refer to Table 5 2 for pinouts Table 5 2 ALARM Port 15 Pin Female D Connector J15 Signal Name Mod Fault C Direction No Direction Mod Fault NC No Direction Mod Fault NO No Direction Demod Fault C No Direction Demod Fault NC No Direction Demod Fault NO No Direction Prompt C No Direction Prompt NC No Direction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Prompt NO No Direction Service C No Direction Service NC No Direction Service NO No Direction No Connection No Direction AGC Out No Direction Ground 5 4 7 EXT CLK J16 The External Clock Port is a 75 Ohm Female BNC Connector It allows interfacing to an external clock source Input level 3 to 5 volts Peak to Peak Sine or Square wave MN DMD50 Revision 3 5 4 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem 5 4 8 ASYNC J17 User Interfaces The Asynchronous Data Interface Port is a 9 Pin Female D Connector Refer to Table 5 3 for pinouts E Table 5 3 ASYNC Port 9 Pin Female D Connector J17 Signal Name Receive Data B RS 485 Direction Receive Data A RS 485 232 Transmit Data A RS 485 232 Transmit Data B RS 485 Ground No Connection No Connection No Connection NI Nn AIIN 5 4 9 J18 No Connection Factory use onl
143. d GND Transmit Audio 2B ESCAUDTX 2B Receive Audio 2B ESCAUDRX 2B Transmit Audio 1B ESCAUDTX 1B Receive Audio 1B ESCAUDRX 1B Transmit Audio 2A ESCAUDTX 2A Receive Audio 2A ESCAUDRX 2A MN BR OO Table 5 8 64K AUDIO In 64K Mode Port 9 Pin Female D Connector J2 Signal Name Direction Send Data A Receive Data A Ground Synchronous Data Send Timing B Synchronous Data Receive Timing B Send Data B Receive Data B Synchronous Data Send Timing A Synchronous Data Receive Timing A MN DMD50 Revision 3 5 9 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem 5 8 J3 User Interfaces The 8K Data Port allows for communications between Earth Stations It is a 15 Pin Female D Connector that complies with IESS 308 Refer to Table 5 9 for pinouts Table 5 9 8K DATA Port 15 Pin Female D Connector J3 Signal Name Receive Octet B Signal ESCRXO B Direction Receive Clock B ESCRXC B Receive Data B ESCRXD B No Connection NC No Connection NC Transmit Data A ESCTXD A Transmit Clock A ESCTXC A Transmit Octet A ESCTXO A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Receive Octet A ESCRXO A Receive Clock A ESCRXC A Receive Data A ESCRXD A Ground GND Transmit Data B ESCTXD B Transmit Clock B ESCTXC B Transmit Octet B 5
144. d channel ES BAUD RATE 150 19200 This allows the user to select the baud rate of the ASYNC port J17 in SCC Mode 7 Under TX ASYNC MODE Menu set the desired ES BITS CHAR ES BITS CHAR 7 8 This allows the user to choose between 7 or 8 bits of data 8 Repeat Steps 4 through 7 under the RX ASYNC MODE menu 9 The physical connection to the overhead channel will be the DB 9 Female Port labeled ASYNC J17 MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 47 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 16 3 17 3 18 EDMAC Satellite Framing Deframing Mode The modem supports EDMAC satellite framing EDMAC can be enables for both modulator and demodulator satellite framing when modem is configured in CLOSED NET applications EDMAC satellite framing DOES NOT allow control or monitoring of the remote slave modem On the demodulator terrestrial date is framed with NULL EDMAC commands having no effect at the remote demodulator On the demodulator EDMAC commands are stripped from the satellite data stream and discarded leaving the terrestrial data steam intact EDMAC Framing Deframing is provided for compatibility purposes only Locating the ID Code Operational Procedure The modem has unique ID codes that allow the user to add feature upgrades to the modem without the unit having to be returned to the factory Users are required to identify these ID codes when they want additional features added to their unit Comtech will supply a new ID c
145. d using a lower order modulation e g QPSK VersaFEC 0 803 increases the total occupied bandwidth while reducing the total power equivalent bandwidth Now using DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier the second QPSK VersaFEC 0 803 carrier can be moved over the first carrier thereby significantly reducing the total occupied bandwidth and total power equivalent bandwidth when compared to the original side by side 8PSK TPC 3 4 carriers To continue consider this example Satellite amp Transponder 15 901 3422 W 22 22 EH EH Earth Station 1 Africa 9 2 m Earth Station 2 Africa 4 5 m Data Rate 2 048 Mbps 2 048 Mbps Whereas the original link used 8 PSK TPC 3 4 the Carrier in Carrier link used QPSK VersaFEC 0 803 The savings summary is as follows Original Link With Carrier in Carrier and VersaFEC Item Savings Remote Hub T Remote Data Rate kbps 2048 2048 2048 2048 Modulation 8 PSK 8 PSK QPSK QPSK FEC TPC 3 4 TPC 3 4 0 803 0 803 Occupied BW MHZ 1 3 1 3 2 6 1 8 1 8 1 8 Power Eq BW MHz 2 2 1 0 3 2 1 1 0 5 1 6 Leased BW MHz 3 2 1 8 44 Hub HPA W 5 0 2 0 60 Remote HPA W 11 6 4 7 60 Note 1 dB HPA BO for QPSK 2 dB HPA BO for 8 PSK 1 dB Feed Loss Using Carrier in Carrier and VersaFEC reduced the leased bandwidth by almost 44 and HPA power by 60 MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 34 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory
146. data the extra two bits are for the async start stop The number of user data slots and control words per frame is selected by the SCC Control Ratio Parameter This can be any value from 1 to 1 through 1 to 7 A higher ratio allows a lower overhead rate but since there are less Sync Words there is a higher acquisition time The following examples show a control ratio of 1 to 3 and 1 to 1 Example 1 shows three Control Words for every Synchronizing Word and Example 2 shows one Control Word for every Synchronizing Word Sync User Control User Control User Control User Word Data Word Data Word Data Word Data 10 bits n bits 10 bits n bits 10 bits n bits 10 bits n bits 10 bits One 1 to 3 Control Ratio Sync User Control User Sync User Control User Word Data Word Data Word Data Word Data 10 bits n bits 10 bits n bits 10 bits n bits 10 bits n bits 10 bits i 3 MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 43 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 1 to 1 Control Ratio The Control Ratio of the receiving units must match the Control Ratio of the transmitting unit MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 44 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 15 2 Aggregate Data Rate The aggregate data rate equals the following User Data Rate In Band Rate Synchronizing Overhead Rate Because SCC must adjust the overhead so that there are an equal number of user data bits in each slot
147. dicates if drop insert data has multiframe lock Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates if the Circular Redundancy Check is passing in PCM 30C and PCM 31C Modes Pass Fail Unmasked Masked The interface is not deleting the expected signaling information Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates that the Framing Unit is unable to find the expected framing pattern Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates that the Reed Solomon Decoder is not locked DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem INTERLEAVER User Interfaces Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates that the Reed Solomon Interleaver is not synchronized RS UNCORR WORD Pass Fail Unmasked Masked TPC IFEC LOCK EBNO dB RX AGC LEVEL IBS BER Indicates status of the Reed Solomon uncoded word fault Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates that the Eb No is outside of limits Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates if Rx level is below allowable limits Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates that there are more than one in 1000 bits in error in IBS Mode RX DVB FRM LOCK Pass Fail Unmasked Masked COMMON menu TERR FPGA CFG CODEC FPGA CFG CODEC DEV CFG VOLTAGES menu 1 5V RX SUPPLY 1 5 TX SUPPLY 3 3V SUPPLY MN DMD50 Revision 3 Indicates that the Rx Satellite Data Stream Framing is not DVB Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates an Interface Card FPGA configuration failure Pass Fa
148. e 5 5 desired carrier i e 0 dB PSD ratio 8 PSK 0 5 dB Measured at IF with AWGN 10 dBc 8 QAM 0 4 dB Adjacent Carriers 1 3 spacing 16 QAM 0 6 dB 3 14 7 Carrier in Carrier Latency Carrier in Carrier has no measurable impact on circuit latency 3 14 8 Carrier in Carrier and Adaptive Coding and Modulation Carrier in Carrier is fully compatible with VersaFEC Adaptive Coding and Modulation ACM mode of operation in the Radyne 50 Carrier in Carrier combined with VersaFEC ACM can provide 100 200 increase in average throughput 3 14 9 Carrier in Carrier Link Design Carrier in Carrier link design involves finding the FEC and modulation combination that provides optimal bandwidth utilization Just like conventional link design it is an iterative process that involves trying different FEC and modulation combinations with Carrier in Carrier until an optimal combination is found For optimal Carrier in Carrier performance it is recommended that the two carriers have similar symbol rate and power This can be achieved by selecting appropriate MODCODs as shown in following sections MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 29 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 14 9 1 Symmetric Data Rate Link Consider the following example Satellite amp Transponder Galaxy 18 123 W 13K 13K Earth Station 1 Phoenix AZ 4 6 m Earth Station 2 Phoenix AZ 2 4 m Data Rate 512 kb
149. e Rx Setup Menu Set the Terrestrial Interface to Ethernet Set the Buffer Size to Zero Set the Buffer Clock to Rx Sat Set the Buffer Clock Polarity to Normal When Ethernet Data Interface is selected the Tx Clock Source will default to SCTE and the Clock Polarity will default to Normal In addition the Buffer Clock will default to RxSat and the Buffer Clock Polarity will default to Normal Ethernet Flow Control When disabled if a packet is received for transmission and no packet buffer space is available the incoming packet is discarded When enabled flow control is used to throttle the transmission station in order to avoid overrunning the transmit buffers which would in turn cause packets to be dropped The throttling mechanism used depends upon the interface and whether it is half duplex or full duplex MN DMD50 Revision J 1 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Ethernet Data Interface Setup J 1 1 1 Half Duplex Flow Control In half duplex mode the unit uses industry standard backpressure to support flow control as follows When available buffer space is almost gone the modem will force a collision on the input port when it senses an incoming packet This collision will cause the transmitting station to back off and retry the transmission The interface will stop forcing collisions as soon as free buffer space becomes available J 1 1 2 Full Duplex Flow Control In full duplex mode the interface implements IEEE 8802 3x
150. e channels The Insert function allows the user to select the T1 or E1 timeslots into which the received satellite channels are to be inserted The two functions are completely independent allowing maximum flexibility in choosing configurations The four port G 703 Interface allows one or more modems to be looped together using the same T1 E1 trunk The Transmit Data Trunk is brought into the modem via the Send Data In SDI Port From there the TX Baseband Processor extracts the selected timeslots from the G 704 Frame and prepares them for transmission The original trunk data is sent out of the modem unaltered via the Send Data Out SDO Port The Receive Data Trunk is brought into the modem via the Insert Data In IDI Port The data is buffered inside the modem and the RX Baseband Processor inserts satellite data into the selected timeslots in the G 703 Frame The modified terrestrial trunk is then output via the Receive Data Out RDO Port Figure H 1 shows two modems looped together This configuration could be simplified to just use one modem or extended to use more than two modems Figure H 2 shows an alternative method of looping where all of the drop transmit data is processed prior to performing any insert receive processing In both configurations the terrestrial trunk is providing the timing for the satellite transmission and for the terrestrial receive MN DMD50 Revision 3 H 1 50 Universal Satellite Modem Drop and Ins
151. eceived satellite data to the Modulator for transmission to the distant end BASEBAND RX Sends Rx data from the Modem Card to the Tx data input to the Modem Card TERR TX Sends Tx Terrestrial Data to Rx data out BASEBAND TX Sends Tx data to the receive input to the BB Card Carrier TYPE normal CW DUAL OFFSET POS FIR NEG FIR Allows the user to set the type of carrier NORMAL Causes the Modulator to output normal modulation CW Causes the Modulator to output a pure carrier DUAL Causes a double sideband output OFFSET Causes a single sideband output POS FIR For manufacturer s use only NEG FIR For manufacturer s use only 4 5 Terminal Mode Control The Terminal Mode Control allows the use of an external terminal or computer to monitor and control the modem from a full screen interactive presentation operated by the modem itself No external software is required other than Terminal Emulation Software e g for a computer when used as a terminal The Control Port is normally used as an RS 232 Connection to the terminal device The RS 232 operating parameters can be set using the modem Front Panel and stored in Non Volatile Memory for future use refer to Remote Protocol Manual for setup and terminal screens MN DMD50 Revision 3 4 42 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces gt NOTE Refer to Remote Protocol Manual for terminal screens 4 5 1 4 5 2 4 6 Modem
152. ed using the keypad Allows the user to edit the Tx Edit map and specify the terrestrial slots that will be dropped into the assigned satellite channels The satellite channels are fixed and the number of channels are determined by the data rate The terrestrial time slots available are determined by the drop mode When the user has finished editing the Tx Edit map it must be copied to the Tx Act map before it will be used by the modem 20 to 10 dB Allows user to select ESC Voice Channel Gain Only displayed when IDR NETWORK and VOICE Channel are selected 20 to 10 dB Allows user to select ESC Voice Channel Gain Only displayed when IDR NETWORK and VOICE Channel are selected Provides entry of Rx Circuit Identifier Circuits can be given up to an 11 Character alphanumeric Identity such as DLINK1 STANDARD INTERFACE RS422 SERIAL RS232 SERIAL V 35 OPTIONAL HARDWARE INTERFACES M2P PARALLEL DVB PARALLEL ASI HSS ETHERNET 10 100 BASE T G 703 T1 AMI T1 B8ZS E1 BAL 1 UNBAL T2 BAL T2 UNBAL E2 703 T1 AMI T1 B8ZS E1 BAL 1 UNBAL T2 BAL T2 UNBAL E2 E3 T3 STS1 Allows the user to select the Transmit Interface 0 64 msecs 4 18 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem BUFFER CLK SRC MAP COPY SRC Map SAT CH TERRCH BUFFER CLOCK POL MN DMD50 Revision 3 User Interfaces Allows the user to set the Doppler Buffer Size in msec The user must assign priorities to the clock so
153. er Circuits can be given up to an 11 Character alphanumeric identity such as LINK1 STANDARD INTERFACE RS422 SERIAL RS232 SERIAL V 35 OPTIONAL HARDWARE INTERFACES M2P PARALLEL DVB PARALLEL ASI HSS ETHERNET 10 100 BASE T 703 T1 AMI T1 B8ZS E1 BAL 1 UNBAL T2 BAL T2 UNBAL E2 703 T1 AMI T1 B8ZS E1 BAL 1 UNBAL T2 BAL T2 UNBAL E2 E3 T3 STS1 Allows the user to select the Transmit Interface Type MN DMD50 Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem ETH FLOW CONTROL ETH DAISY CHAIN ETH QOS TYPE ETH QOS QUEUE TX CLK SRC TX CLK POL SCT CLK SRC DROP amp INSERT menu DROP MODE MAP COPY MN DMD50 Revision 3 User Interfaces Disabled Enabled Allows the user to disable or enable flow control Only visible when Ethernet is selected as the interface type Disabled Enabled Allows the user to disable the Ethernet Port Daisy Chaining Only visible when Ethernet is selected as the interface type NORMAL PORT BASED Selects the priority hierarchy of processing an IEEE 803 3ac Tag Ipv4 Type of Service Field Differentiated Services Field or Ipv6 Traffic Class Field The Port Based priority overrides any standard priority When operating in this mode JS1 has the highest priority and JS4 has the lowest FAIR WEIGHTED STRICT PRIORITY Selects the queue weighting of 8 4 2 1 that insures even the lowest priority traffic gets some bandwidth Strict
154. er 4 and Appendix D for information on how upgrade features are enabled 1 2 3 Hardware Options Hardware options refer to Appendix A are purchased parts that can be installed into the unit at the customer s site screwdriver 15 normally the only tool required Please contact the Customer Service Department for information not limited to availability and to shipping costs E NOTE Only authorized service personnel should handle and install optional hardware options 1 2 4 Factory Installed Options Units may also be sent to the factory for hardware option installation Please contact the Customer Service Department for information not limited to availability and to shipping costs 1 3 Function Accessibility All functions can be accessed with a terminal or personal computer via a serial link for complete remote monitoring and control capability MN DMD50 Revision 3 1 2 Chapter 2 Installation 2 1 Unpacking and Inspection Inspect shipping containers for damage If shipping containers are damaged keep them until the contents of the shipment have been carefully inspected and checked for normal operation The Universal Satellite Modem and its Installation and Operation Manual are packaged and shipped in a pre formed reusable cardboard carton containing foam spacing for maximum shipping protection Do not use any cutting tool that will extend more than 1 2 inch into the container This can cause damage to the modem
155. ert D amp I SD DDI Terrestrial Trunk SD DDI Figure H 1 Looped Modems SD DDI Terrestrial Trunk Terrestrial Tunk a RD 00 SD DDI RD IDO Figure H 2 Looped Modems with Separate D amp I Trunks MN DMD50 Revision 3 H 2 50 Universal Satellite Modem Drop and Insert D amp I H 1 1 H 1 2 Drop Only When Drop is enabled and Insert is disabled the unit performs a drop only function Framed E1 or T1 Data is input via the Send Data In Port the selected timeslots are dropped into the IBS frame structure and the unaltered terrestrial data is output via the Send Data Out Port refer to Figure H 3 SD DDI Terrestrial Trunk RD IDO Figure H 3 Drop Only Insert Only When Insert is enabled and Drop is disabled the unit performs an insert only function If framed terrestrial E1 or T1 Data is available it should be input via the Insert Data In Port The Terrestrial Data is buffered inside the Modem The RX Baseband Processor inserts satellite data into the selected timeslots in the G 704 Frame and the modified terrestrial data is then output via the Receive Data Out Port refer to Figure H 4 If framed terrestrial data is not available selection of the Internal T1 E1 frame source will cause the modem to generate the required G 704 Frame The Satellite Data will be inserted into the selected timeslots and the resulting terrestrial data will be output via the Receive Data Out P
156. es Section 3 2 4 MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 5 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 3 1 Terminal Port This port supports an asynchronous control protocol as described in Section 4 It is configured to support RS 232 signal levels This port is intended for use in computer based remote functions of the modem may be monitored and controlled from this port via a common terminal connected to the Terminal Port This function is front panel selectable The Terminal Mode Control allows the use of an external terminal or computer to monitor and control the modem from a full screen interactive presentation operated by the modem itself No external software is required other than VT 100 Terminal Emulation Software e g Procomm for a computer when used as a terminal The Control Port is normally used as an RS 232 Connection to the terminal device The RS 232 operating parameters can be set using the modem Front Panel and stored in Non volatile memory for future use Refer to the Remote Protocol Manual TM117 for the Terminal Remote and SNMP screens and protocols 3 3 2 Modem Remote Communications RLLP The Remote Port located on J20 allows for control and monitoring of parameters and functions via an RS 232 Serial Interface or RS 485 for RLLP Protocol Equipment Remote Mode setup can be entered from the front panel or the Web Browser interface under the System menu This requires the user to first set the
157. et to a foreign address This address is expressed in hexadecimal format Broadcast and loop back addresses will not be allowed These are addresses with all subnet bits set to 0 s or 1 s DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces NOTE To change the display for the IP ADDRESS MASK MODEM IP ADDRESS SERVER IP ADDRESS AND ROUTER IP ADDRESS press all four arrow keys simultaneously MODEM EADDR 001065010000 Displays the Ethernet address of the device Set at the factory and is a unique identifier for the Ethernet physical interface ETHER RATE 10 MBPS HD The data rate for the local Ethernet Interface 10 Mbps HD for 10 Base T in either half duplex or full duplex SNMP menu A description of OID organization is provided in the MIB portion of this manual Appendix C SNMP VERSION V1 amp V2 V3 This selection controls the SNMP Version that will be used in messaging between the equipment and it s host When amp V2 is used RD COMMUNITY and RDWR COMMUNITY are used to determine the authorization of an incoming message When V3 is used three contexts are supported public mib2 and dev Context Authentication and Privacy are a portion of each SNMPV3 message The public context will only allow the user to see the sysoid of the unit This is the most restricted access possible and only allows the unit to be identified by a host SNMP Station The mib2 context allows a user with appropriate authen
158. face Setup J 1 6 Packet Statistics The following statistics are available under the Monitor Menu when the Ethernet Data Interface is selected Total Packets This Counter displays the total number of Ethernet packets received from the satellite Error Packets This counter displays the total number of Ethernet packets received from the satellite that had errors Packet Error Rate This displays the Ethernet Packet Error Rate PER from the satellite Packet Statistics Reset Allows the user to reset the Ethernet Total Packets and Ethernet Error Count by pressing lt Enter gt Link Status The following status is available under the Monitor Menu Link Status Sub Menu when the Ethernet Data Interface is selected Port 1 Status Displays the current status of LAN Port 1 Port 2 Status Displays the current status of LAN Port 2 Port 3 Status Displays the current status of LAN Port 3 WAN Status Displays the current status of the WAN Port For each of the above listed ports the status may take on one of the following values meanings Down The link is down Unresolved Unable to agree on connection speed 10 Mbps Half Connected at 10 Base T Half Duplex 10 Mbps Full Connected at 10 Base T Full Duplex 100 Mbps Half Connected at 100 Base T Half Duplex 100 Mbps Full Connected at 100 Base T Full Duplex If all four LAN Ports are down a Tx Data Activity Minor Alarm will be generated If the WAN Port is down a Tx and Rx Ethe
159. for 8448000 Under Mod IF Menu Set desired Tx frequency and power level Turn IF ON MN DMD50 Revision 3 E 6 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Strap Codes Method 2 Under Interface Menu Set Interface type Set Tx clock selection Set Mod strap code to 128 Under Mod IF Menu Set desired Tx frequency and power level Turn IF on Demodulator Method 1 Under Interface Menu Set Interface type Set Buff clock selection Set Buffer Size Set mode to IDR Under Demod IF Menu Set desired Rx frequency Under Demod data Menu Set code rate to 3 4 VIT Set data rate for 8448000 Method 2 Under Interface Menu Set Interface type Set Buff clock selection Set Buffer Size Set Demod strap code to 128 Under Demod IF Menu set desired Rx frequency 3 2 Case 2 IBS 1 544 Mbps 3 4 Rate Viterbi Starting with the Data Rate 512 Kbps Modulator Method 1 Under Interface Menu Set Interface type Set Tx clock selection Set Framing to 1 15 Set mode to IBS Under Mod Data Menu Set code rate to 3 4 VIT Set data rate for 1544000 Under Mod IF Menu Set desired Tx frequency and power level MN DMD50 Revision 3 E 7 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Strap Codes Turn IF ON Method 2 Under Interface Menu Set Interface type Set Tx clock selection Set Mod strap code to 120 Under Mod IF Menu Set desired Tx frequency and power level Turn IF on Demodulator Method 1 Under Interface Menu Set Interface type Set Buff clock selecti
160. ftware configurable modem Large fast FPGAs now provide designers with what is essentially an on the fly programmable ASIC High speed complex digital logic functions that previously could only be implemented in dedicated integrated circuits are now downloaded from a micro controller through a serial or peripheral interface When a new digital logic function is needed a new configuration file is loaded into the FPGA There is no limit to the number of digital logic configurations available to the FPGA aside from the amount of Flash memory available to the system microprocessor for storage of configuration files The Baseband Processing Printed Circuit Card provides a flexible architecture that allows many different modes of terrestrial and satellite framing various FEC options digital voice processing and several different modulation demodulation formats Also included on the Baseband Printed Circuit Card are three synchronous interfaces an EIA 530 Interface supporting RS 422 V 35 and RS 232 AII three interfaces are provided on the same DB 25 Connector and are selectable from the front panel MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 2 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 1 3 3 2 The Baseband Printed Circuit Card also contains the Monitor and Control M amp C Circuitry responsible for Programmable part setup and initialization Continuous control and adjustment of some functions Calibration Monitoring fault status
161. functionality found in the Drop amp Insert open network standard plus Automatic Uplink Power Control By comparison the Drop amp Insert open network standard requires 4267 bps per slot so by utilizing Efficient Drop and Insert Radyne customers can realize a bandwidth savings of over 4000 bps per slot Calculating the Efficient D amp I Rate with E1 Signaling When signaling is enabled PCM 30 an additional 2000 bps per slot are required to carry E1 signaling So the Efficient D amp I Rate for N timeslots is Efficient D amp I Rate increase N 2000 bps With the Drop amp Insert open network standard requiring 4267 bps per slot Efficient Drop and Insert provides a bandwidth savings of over 2000 bps slot when signaling is required MN DMD50 Revision 3 1 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Efficient Drop and Insert D amp I 1 34 Calculating the Efficient D amp I Rate with Enhanced Asynchronous Overhead The amount of overhead required to carry the Enhanced Async is driven by the in band baud rate The calculation is a two step process involving the in band baud rate and the number of slots as follows X Truncation of In Band Baud Rate N 125 Efficient D amp I Rate increase X N 125 bps Because of the truncation this increase in bandwidth is guaranteed to be less than the baud rate itself Summary and Examples The following examples further illustrate how to calculate the Eff
162. he Buffer Clock Polarity will default to Normal Reed Solomon Codec NOTE Refer to Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 and Table 3 1 3 9 1 Utilizing a Reed Solomon R S Outer Codec concatenated with a Convolutional Inner Codec is an effective way to produce very low error rates even for poor signal to noise ratios while requiring only a small increase in transmission bandwidth Typically concatenating an R S Codec requires an increase in transmission bandwidth of only 9 12 while producing a greater than 2 dB improvement in E N R S is a block Codec where data bytes are fed into the encoder which adds 2t 2 N K check bytes to produce an N byte R S block The R S decoder can then correct up to erred bytes in the block Reed Solomon Operation When the Reed Solomon Codec is enabled data is fed to the R S Encoding Section where it is scrambled formed into blocks R S encoded and interleaved Unique words are added so that the blocks can be reformed in the Receiving Modem Refer to Figure 3 8 and Figure 3 9 Data is then sent to the modulator where it is convolutionally encoded modulated and transmitted to the satellite When the signal is received and demodulated by the Receiving Modem it is fed to a Viterbi Decoder for the first layer of error correction After error correction is performed by the Viterbi Decoder the unique words are located and the data is deinterleaved and reformed into blocks The R S Decoder then
163. he Frequency Reference Source High Stability is only displayed if the appropriate hardware is detected Allows the user to select the reference clock frequency in MHz ES ES ESC ENHANCED ES ES 15 the normal IBS Channel ESC Enhanced can be selected in Closed Net and uses the Overhead Signaling bytes in the IBS Overhead to pass asynchronous data RS 232 RS 485 Allows the user to select the interface type DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem ES BAUD RATE ES BITS CHAR RX ES ENHANCED menu RX ASYNC MODE ES INTERFACE ES BAUDRATE ES BITS CHAR User Interfaces 150 19200 Allows the user to select the baud rate in Enhanced Async Mode Available rates are listed in Table 3 3 7 8 Allows the user to choose between 7 or 8 bit data ES ES ESC ENHANCED ES ES is the normal IBS Async Channel ESC Enhanced can be selected in Closed Net and uses the Overhead Signaling bytes in the IBS Overhead to pass asynchronous data RS 232 RS 485 Allows the user to select the interface type 150 19200 Allows the user to select the Baud rate in Enhanced Async Mode 7 8 Allows the user to choose between 7 or 8 bit data 4 4 5 Monitor Menu Options and Parameters EVENTS ERASE EVENTS PRESS CLEAR INPUT LVL dBm EBNO dB REMOTE EB NO RAW BER CORRECTED BER MN DMD50 Revision 3 Displays a history of events recorded in the event buffer A maximum of 100 events may be stored i
164. he Rx Buffer Clock source Tx and Rx Clocks may be independently locked INVERT NONE INV TERR amp BASE INV BASEBAND INV TERR DATA DATA POLARITY CLOCK amp DATA MODULATION SD TT ST Qmm j is NORMAL High Stability HIGH STABILITY CR INVERTED Oscillator REF FREQ INTERNAL _ AUTO EXTERNAL SRC SCT CLK 550 SRC i TRANSMIT RECEIVE A EXT CLK i ID CLOCK RECOVERY NORMAL INVERTED Be EXT IDI RT 7 BUFFER CLK suremaxr 280 amp RECOVERY DEMODULATION DATA POLARITY RD lt INVERT NONE INV TERR amp BASE INV BASEBAND INV TERR DATA Figure 3 7 Clocking and Polarity Diagram 3 7 1 TX Clock Options TX clock options can be recovered from the terrestrial interface satellite interface or internally generated The allows users to select SCTE Clock Terrestrial or the SCT internal clock The modem also allows user to recover the SCT Clock from the satellite SCR or from the modem internally The modem allows users to select clock polarity The Tx clock selections available are 3 11 MN DMD50 Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation The following paragraphs define the types
165. he encoder enabled ensures proper phase lock May not be adjustable in some modes NONE V 35 IESS V 35 CITT V 35 EF IBS w Optional Framing and optional Reed Solomon Reed Solomon Scrambler w Optional Framing CCITT V 35FC OM 73 V 35EF_RS TPC SCRAMBLER Turbo Codec DVB EDMAC Allows the user to select the descrambler type ENABLED DISABLE Allows the user to enable or disable scrambler operation 1 15 IBS 1 15 Async 96 Kbps IDR DVB EDMAC EFAUPC SCC EFFICIENT D amp I None Used with IDR IBS or Asynchronous Interface Only Allows the user to select the framing type 4 7 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem IN BAND RATE SCC CTL RATIO SCC INBAND RATE TERR FRAMING DATA POLARITY SYMBOL PAIR ESC OVERHEAD AUPC menu LOCAL AUPC menu AUPC MODE MN DMD50 Revision 3 User Interfaces 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Allows the user to select the rate of in band data for the ES to ES Async overhead channel Only displayed when Effiecient D amp I with Enhanced Async are selected 4 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 Allows the user to simulate the framing used by the Satellite Control Channel Option Pass Thru Mode only The SCC CTL RATIO is the ratio of overhead in band data to synchronizing words Only displayed when SCC Framing is selected 300 to 200000 when using SCC Framing Allows the user to request the rate of in band data for the overhead channel O
166. he user to optimize the In Band 1200 Rate based on the amount of traffic that will pass over the 2400 satellite In most cases this should be set to the same rate or 4800 higher than the TX amp RX Async ES port baud rate When this 9600 rate is set lower than the ES port baud rate the user must insure 19200 that the actual ES to ES transmission rate does not exceed the In Band Rate otherwise characters will be dropped Calculating the Required Satellite Bandwidth In order to calculate the satellite bandwidth i e the symbol rate we must first calculate the Efficient D amp I Rate i e the data rate plus the overhead required for Efficient Drop amp Insert From there the calculation of the required satellite bandwidth is identical to all other modes of operation and simply takes into account modulation type and forward error correction In this section we will cover the calculation of the basic Efficient D amp I Rate as well as the two cases that alter the basic rate Calculating the Basic Efficient D amp I Rate When signaling is not required all 1 and PCM31 cases and Enhanced Async is not enabled the Earth Station to Earth Station link is the standard ES ES the Efficient D amp I Rate for N timeslots is as follows Efficient D amp I Rate Data Rate N 250 bps In other words the basic Efficient Drop amp Insert Rate only requires 250 bps of overhead per slot while at the same time providing all of the
167. icient D amp I rate which can be summarized for N timeslots as Efficient D amp I Rate Data Rate N 250 bps With signaling add N 2000 bps With Enhanced Async add Truncation In Band Baud N 125 N 125 bps Example la 5 Drop Slots with T1 D4 framing standard ES to ES overhead For 5 Drop Slots the Data Rate would be 5 64000 or 320000 bps The Efficient D amp I Rate would be 320000 5 250 bps 321250 bps The Drop amp Insert Open Network rate is over 20 000 bps higher at 341333 bps Example 1b Change to E1 PCM30 framing E1 Signaling standard ES to ES overhead Add 5 2000 bps to our previous calculation gives 331250 bps Still saving over 10 000 bps compared to the open network standard Example 1 Change to Enhanced Async with In Band Baud Rate of 1200 MN DMD50 Revision 3 14 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Efficient Drop and Insert D amp I X Truncation of 1200 5 125 X Truncation of 1 92 X 1 Add 1 5 125 bps to our previous calculation gives 331875 bps An increase of 625 bps to carry 1200 baud Example 2a 10 Drop Slots with T1 D4 framing standard ES to ES overhead For 10 Drop Slots the Data Rate would be 10 64000 or 640000 bps The Efficient D amp I Rate would be 640000 10 250 bps 642500 bps The Drop amp Insert Open Network rate is over 40 000 bps higher at 682667 bps Example 2b Change to E1 PCM30 framing E1 Signaling standard ES to ES overhead Add 10 2000 bps
168. ics show no results if successful If a failure is detected the Fault LED will illuminate The initial field checkout of the modem can be accomplished from the Front Panel or in the Terminal Mode The Terminal Mode has the advantage of providing full screen access to all of the modem s parameters but requires a separate terminal or computer running a Terminal Program The Terminal Mode is enabled from the front panel in the System M amp C Submenus MN DMD50 Revision 3 2 5 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem 2 5 2 Factory Terminal Setup The factory terminal setup is as follows Emulation Type Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits MN DMD50 Revision 3 VT 100 can be changed 19 2 K Can be changed via Front Panel 8 No Parity Fixed 1 Stop Bit Installation 2 6 Chapter 3 Theory of Operation 3 1 Modem Hardware The modem is based on a two printed circuit card minimum configuration design with additional optioned printed circuit cards available for additional features The minimum configuration consists of an L Band IF Assembly and a Digital Baseband Assembly The optional printed circuit cards include a Turbo Codec printed circuit card and one of several types of Interface printed circuit card refer to Appendix A A block diagram of the DMD50 is shown in Figure 3 1 Interface Card Optional Digital Baseband Card Turbo Card Optional Figure 3 1 Block Diagram 3 1 1 L Band IF P
169. ides brief application notes for operating the modem and explains by example how to configure the modem for some of the most popular configurations The following information illustrates the allowable combinations for Mode and Data Rate Allowable Combinations Mode Rate Framing IDR 8 448 Mbps 3 4 7 8 Rate FEC 6 312 Mbps 1 2 3 4 7 8 Rate FEC 2 048 Mbps 1 2 3 4 7 8 Rate FEC 1 544 Mbps or Below 1 2 3 4 7 8 Rate FEC MN DMD50 Revision 3 E 5 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Strap Codes IBS 2 048 Mbps or below 1 2 3 4 7 8 Rate Closed Network 8 448 96 Kb Framing or No Framing 3 4 7 8 Rate FEC 6 312 96 Kb Framing or No Framing 1 2 3 4 7 8 Rate FEC 2 048 96 Kb Framing or 1 15 Framing or No Framing 1 2 3 4 7 8 Rate FEC 1 544 96 Kb Framing or 1 15 Framing or No Framing 1 2 3 4 7 8 Rate FEC Any Rate 2 048 amp lower 1 15 Framing or No Framing 1 2 3 4 7 8 Rate FEC E 3 Operational Case Examples For best results always begin setup by setting the data rate to 512 Kbps This data rate is applicable for all modes and as such provides a convenient launch point for setting up the modem mode of operation can be entered from this starting point E 3 1 Case 1 8 448 Mbps 3 4 Rate Viterbi Starting with the Data Rate 512 Kbps Modulator Method 1 Under Interface Menu Set Interface type Set Tx clock selection Set mode to IDR Under Mod Data Menu Set code rate to 3 4 VIT Set data rate
170. iency using DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier Spectral Efficiency bps Hz SO and Code Rate SCPC Carrier in Carrier BPSK 1 2 0 50 1 00 QPSK 1 2 1 00 2 00 QPSK 2 3 1 33 2 67 QPSK 3 4 1 50 QPSK 7 8 1 75 8 QAM 2 3 2 00 8 QAM 3 4 2 25 4 50 8 QAM 7 8 2 63 5 25 16 QAM 3 4 3 00 6 00 16 QAM 7 8 7 00 As shown here DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier allows equivalent spectral efficiency using a lower order modulation and or FEC Code Rate CAPEX is therefore reduced by allowing the use of a smaller BUC HPA and or antenna And as DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier can be used to save transponder bandwidth and or transponder power it can be successfully deployed in bandwidth limited as well as power limited scenarios 3 14 5 DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier Cancellation Process The state of the art signal processing technology employed via DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier continually estimates and tracks all parametric differences between the local uplink signal and its image within the downlink Through advanced adaptive filtering and phase locked loop implementations it dynamically compensates for these differences by appropriately adjusting the delay frequency phase and amplitude of the sampled uplink signal resulting in excellent cancellation performance When a full duplex satellite connection is established between two sites separate satellite channels are alloca
171. igured for NEARSIDE AUPC the maximum Transmit Power is the highest power setting that will be used by the local modem when the Eb No decreases below the Eb No target 4 0 to 16 dB 4 9 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem TRACKING RATE LOCAL CL ACTION REMOTE CL ACTION REMOTE AUPC menu AUPC MODE LOOPBACK MN DMD50 Revision 3 User Interfaces This allows the user to set the desired for the local receiver RADYNE AUPC When configured for Radyne AUPC this setting is compared against the remote E N and commands to the local modem to increase or decrease the local transmit power EF AUPC When configured for EF AUPC this setting is compared against the local received and commands to the remote modem to increase or decrease transmit power NEARSIDE When configured for NEARSIDE AUPC this setting is compared against the received E N of the local modem and commands to the local modem to increase or decrease transmit power 0 5 to 6 0 Allows the user to set the rate at which the commands to increase or decrease Transmit Power are sent Each command will result in a 0 5 dB increase or decrease in Transmit Power from remote transmitter The tracking rate is adjustable from 0 5 dB per minute to 6 0 dB per minute in 0 5 dB steps Only available when EFAUPC is selected as the framing HOLD NOMINAL MAXIMUM This allows the user to set the Remote Transmit Power Setting to be used when the
172. il Unmasked Masked Indicates Turbo Codec Card FPGA configuration failure Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates Turbo Codec Card ASIC configuration failure Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Displays the measured voltage of the 1 5 Volt Rx power bus located inside the modem Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Displays the measured voltage of the 1 5 Volt Tx power bus located inside the modem Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Displays the measured voltage of the 3 3 Volt power bus located inside the modem DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem 5V SUPPLY 12V SUPPLY 20V SUPPLY 12V SUPPLY EXT CLOCK ACT EXT REF ACT EXT REF LOCK User Interfaces Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Displays the measured voltage of the 5 Volt power bus located inside the modem Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Displays the measured voltage of the 12 Volt power bus located inside the modem Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Displays the measured voltage of the 20 Volt power bus located inside the modem Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Displays the measured voltage of the 20 Volt power bus located inside the modem Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates the External Clock activity Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates the External Reference activity Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates the External Reference PLL is locked detection Refer to Section 4 4 6 CURRENT ALARMS for an explanation of the Latched
173. imize the potential impact of these dependencies H 2 1 Data Rate Data Rate affects the Drop and Insert function in the following ways It determines the number of Satellite Channels that will be displayed in the Edit Maps e It contributes to the Operational Mode selection process Trying to change the Operational Mode to D amp I when a data rate is not set to a valid D amp I rate will result in the error message INVALID DATA RATE and the mode change will not be allowed MN DMD50 Revision 3 H 8 50 Universal Satellite Modem Drop and Insert D amp I 2 2 e It contributes to Terrestrial Framing Mode selection process Trying to select a T1 type Drop Mode such as T1 ESF with the mod data rate set to 1920000 bps a valid D amp I rate but not a valid T1 rate will result in the error message INVALID DROP MODE and the selection will not be allowed Trying to select a T1 type Insert Mode such as T1 D4 with the demod data rate set to 1920000 bps will result in the error message INVALID INSERT MODE and the selection will not be allowed e Once D amp I Mode has been selected trying to change the data rate to something other than another valid D amp I data rate will result in the error message RATE OUT OF BOUNDS and the change will not be allowed Once D amp I Mode has been selected with a Terrestrial Framing Mode attempting to change the data rate to 1920000 will result in the error message
174. ir or replacement of failed parts and the return shipment to the buyer of the repaired or replaced parts Limitations of Warranty The warranty does not apply to any part of a product that has been installed altered repaired or misused in any way that in the opinion of Comtech EF Data Corporation would affect the reliability or detracts from the performance of any part of the product or is damaged as the result of use in a way or with equipment that had not been previously approved by Comtech EF Data Corporation The warranty does not apply to any product or parts thereof where the serial number or the serial number of any of its parts has been altered defaced or removed The warranty does not cover damage or loss incurred in transportation of the product The warranty does not cover replacement or repair necessitated by loss or damage from any cause beyond the control of Comtech EF Data Corporation such as lightning or other natural and weather related events or wartime environments The warranty does not cover any labor involved in the removal and or reinstallation of warranted equipment or parts on site or any labor required to diagnose the necessity for repair or replacement vii DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Revision 3 Preface MN DMD50 The warranty excludes any responsibility by Comtech EF Data Corporation for incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of the equipment or products or for any ina
175. iva B 1 20 Procedure RR TEEETT MB B 1 B 4 Demonstration vu Praec IF eub eL ue S TIR XM B 3 B 4 1 Running in Demonstration B 5 B 4 2 Canceling Demonstration Mode 6 APPENDIX CARRIER CONTHOL tee eee C 1 e UU T H M M C 1 2 OUD REP C 1 uet e irre Ir TU iussis Quot i tv TATER C 1 Table of Contents Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem MN DMD50 C4 Carrier c M 2 CD Carrier 2 C6 Carrier RTS casas cccessasincticsscusestecsstnsicvacoussecinotsaenancestanssbessicnssocteensuctouenasesve tstabussevekeutaeasucsuesnnsesseeets 2 APPENDIX WEB BROWSER SETUP GUIDE nene D 1 0 1 AMP OMUCHON Meet D 1 0 2 WEB Users Configtiratinicessscsssissssserssesssessisssssestessvsesssnadecnessveessseaboenseoseoevesestsnnassseonassesesesesse sts 0 2 D 3 Change Web User eese iecescesnsstcccsevcesovckevsececoutes soansveencguecessoensdsoeectetesdoensvesedsusasoosns D 3 0 4 Change Authentication Password 4 e eeee eee ee eee eee ee
176. ive will ask you for this number along with your desired feature set upgrades when placing your order 3 Once your order has been processed you will be issued a 12 digit feature set upgrade code This code is only good on the modem for which it was ordered To enter this code from the front panel perform the following From the modem s Main Menu scroll right to the SYSTEM Menu Scroll down Scroll right to the HW FW CONFIG Menu Scroll down Scroll right to the FEATURES Menu Scroll down HARTS The value displayed on the top line of this menu is the 12 digit Unit ID Itis displayed on the front panel of the modem as 3 sets of 4 digits in a dot delineated format indicated in Step 2 The second line is the data entry area and is displayed as 3 sets of 4 underscores in a dot delineated format g Press lt ENTER gt A cursor will begin flashing in the data entry area h Using the numeric keypad enter your 12 digit upgrade code i Press lt ENTER gt If the code entered is correct the display will display CODE ACCEPTED otherwise the INVALID CODE will be displayed MN DMD50 Revision 3 B 2 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Front Panel Upgrade Procedure Care should be taken to insure that the upgrade code is entered properly After three unsuccessful attempts to enter a code the front panel upgrade and demonstration capability will be locked out and it will be necessary to cycle power on the modem in order to co
177. larms Form C Contacts Fault Form C Contacts Open Collector Faults Rx RF Equipment Asynchronous Overhead 100 240 VAC 48 VDC Option 50 60 Hz Terminal 10 Base T Ethernet a Remote Serial Interfaces Figure 3 3 Universal Satellite Modem Functional Block Diagram Front Panel The Front Panel includes a 2 x 16 backlit LCD Display Indicator LEDs and a Numeric Keypad refer to Chapter 4 Baseband Processing The Baseband Processor performs all of the functions required for an IBS IDR Framing Unit a Reed Solomon Codec and an E1 T1 Drop and Insert System In addition the Baseband Processing Section provides for transmit clock selection and rate adaptation as well as a rate adapter and Plesiochronous Doppler PD Buffer in the receive direction A multiplexer is also provided for the SCT Clock Source for Loop Timing Applications The transmit and receive paths may be configured independently under processor control MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 4 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 3 Tx Baseband Processing The Tx Data and Clock enters the Baseband Processor passes through a Rate Adapting FIFO and enters the Framer Drop Processor In IDR IBS and D amp I Modes the framer adds the appropriate framing and ESC as defined in IESS 308 and 309 In D amp I Mode the framer acquires the terrestrial framing structure E1 or
178. ltiplexer would know to look only at the first two entries in the Active Receive table and would ignore the other 28 entries If the first two entries were modified to contain a 27 and 28 the data would be inserted into the 27 and 28 time slots of the E1 frame ROM 3 could be used as the template for an Active Transmit Drop Map with a modulator and or demodulator configured for 256 Kbps operation The T1 or 1 Data in the transmit path or the demodulated data in the receive path would be dropped from and or inserted into the first four time slots of the T1 or E1 frame The Multiplexer would know to look only at the first 4 entries in the Active map s and would ignore the other 26 entries ROM Map 4 could be used as the template for an Active Transmit Drop or Active Receive Insert Map with a modulator and or demodulator configured for 384 Kbps operation The 1 or E1 Data in the transmit path or the demodulated data in the receive path would be dropped from and or inserted into the first six time slots of the T1 or E1 frame The Insert Multiplexer would know to look only at the first six entries in the Active map s and would ignore the other 24 entries To Drop the last six channels of a T1 frame into a modulator transmit path the first six entries of the Active Transmit map should contain 19 20 21 22 23 and 24 ROM Map 5 could be used as the template for an Active Transmit Drop and or Active Receive Insert Map with a modula
179. meslots to insert where n 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15 16 20 24 or 30 Because there is no implied ABCD signaling the user is free to select timeslot 16 as a Drop or Insert Timeslot H 1 3 4 PCM 31C The PCM 31C Mode of Operation supports an E1 Interface with no Multiframe Alignment MFAS or Channel Associated Signaling CAS In addition the Drop Function verifies the received terrestrial CRC checksum and the Insert Function calculates the required CRC checksum The user may independently program n timeslots to drop and n timeslots to insert where n 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15 16 20 24 or 30 Because there is no implied ABCD signaling the user is free to select timeslot 16 as a Drop or Insert Timeslot H 1 3 5 T1 D4 T1 D4 S The T1 D4 Mode of Operation supports a T1 Interface with 12 frames per multiframe The user may independently program n timeslots to drop and n timeslots to insert where n 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15 16 20 24 or 30 Robbed Bit Signaling RBS is handled without any need for operator intervention and is transparent to the user H 1 3 6 T1 ESF T1 ESF S The T1 ESF Mode of Operation supports a T1 Interface with 24 frames per multiframe The CRC 6 checksum is automatically checked by the Drop Function and generated by the Insert Function and placed in the appropriate F bit positions in the terrestrial multiframe The user may independently program n timeslots to drop and n timesl
180. mon SCBWO 3C Data A IDR ESC Backward Alarm Output 3 Normally Open 3NO External Clock Input A BAL EXC A SS ns OE IL MEN 16 IDR ESC Audio Input Channel 2A Input 2A IDR ESC Backward Alarm Input 3 ESCBWI 3 IBS ES Transmit Data A IDR ESC Backward Alarm TXD A BWI 1 Input 1 MN DMD50 Revision 3 5 11 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces No 28 IDR ESC Backward Alarm Output 4 Normally ESCBWO No Direction Closed 4NC 35 37 IDR ESC Backward Alarm Out 1 Normally ESCBWO 1 No Direction Closed NC G 703 Insert Data Input B G703B IDI B Synchronous Data Send Timing Output B SYNC ST B IDR ESC Backward Alarm Out 2 Common ESCBWO 2C Synchronous Data Terminal Timing B SYNC TT B IDR ESC Backward Alarm Output 2 Normally Open 2NO Timing B IDR ESC Backward Alarm Out 3 Normally Closed 3NC G 703 Insert Data Out Synchronous Data IDO B RD B IDR ESC Backward Alarm Out 4 Common ESCBWO 4C External Clock Input B BAL EXC B Se lil IDR ESC Audio Input Channel 1B ESCAUDTX Input 1B 50 IDRESC Audio Input Channel 2B ESCAUDTX Input 2B IDR ESC Audio Output Channel 1B ESCAUDRX 1B IDR ESC Audio Output Channel 2B ESCAUDRX 2 IDR ESC Backward Alarm _ Input 4 ESCBWI 4 5 IBS ES Transmit Data IDR ESC Backward TX B BWI2 Input Alarm Input 2 5 4 5 Demod Fault Open Collector Output DMD FLT Output Open Collector 56 56 185
181. monitor and control modem parameter settings change other interface user names and passwords and modify IP network settings The web user database consists of three users USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 with initial default names of guest oper and admin Access rights and authentication make it possible to restrict access to a specified set of web users There are three levels of security privileges that can be assigned to any user They are e GUEST Users are able to navigate most of the site and view modem parameter settings OPER Users can monitor and control modem parameter settings and change their own authentication passwords e ADMIN At this highest access right users can monitor and control modem parameter settings change any user s name and authentication password and modify IP network settings This setting has full access to the entire site e NO GROUP Assigning this will block all access from the site Listed in the table below are the factory default user names and corresponding default passwords and settings USER ID Access Authentication Web User Group Password USER 1 GUEST guest guest USER 2 OPER oper oper USER 3 ADMIN admin admin IMPORTANT All entries are case sensitive Using the Front Panel display and arrow keys scroll thru the System menu until the WEB sub menu is displayed Enter into the WEB menu and the following Sub menus will appear order may vary MN DMD50 Revision 3 D
182. n 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15 16 20 24 30 Framing Type 1 15 IBS Scrambler Type IESS 309 Spectrum Mask Intelsat Efficient D amp I Closed Network Data Rates n x 64 N 1 31 Any combination Descrambler Type IESS 309 Spectrum Mask Intelsat MN DMD50 Revision 3 4 5 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem STRAP CODE IF menu FREQUENCY MHz POWER dBm CARRIER SPECTRUM MODULATION SPECTRAL MASK MN DMD50 Revision 3 User Interfaces DVB Per EN301 421 amp En301 210 Data Rates Rates Framing Type DVB Scrambler Type DVB Spectrum Mask DVB 0 25 0 35 Closed Net possible combinations allowed however DVB settings requires the DVB network spec Activates the AUPC Menu Refer to Strap Code Guide Appendix The Strap Code is a quick set key that sets many modem parameters Consult the strap code guide for available strap codes Parameters set by strap code Data Rate Inner Code Rate Satellite Framing Scrambler Drop and Insert Outer Code Rate Reed Solomon Modulation Network Spec 50 90 MHz 100 180 MHz or 950 2050 MHz Allows the user to enter the Modulator IF Output Frequency of the modem in 1 Hz increments 0 to 25 dBm Allows the user to enter the Transmitter Power Level ON OFF AUTO VSAT RTS Allows the user to select the carrier type Refer to Appendix E for further information NORMAL INVERTED Allows the user to invert the direction of r
183. n instructions A require that the integrity of the protective earth must be ensured and that the equipment shall be connected to the protective earth connection at all times Therefore it is imperative during installation configuration and operation that the user ensures that the unit has been properly grounded using the ground stud provided on the rear panel of the unit e In Finland Laite on liitett v suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan e In Norway Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt e In Sweden Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag Fuses FOR CONTINUED OPERATOR SAFETY ALWAYS REPLACE THE FUSES WITH THE CORRECT TYPE AND RATING CAUTION The DMD50 contains no Fuses DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Revision 3 Preface MN DMD50 Environmental The DMD50 must not be operated in an environment where the unit is exposed to precipitation condensation humid atmospheres above 95 RH altitudes unpressurized greater than 2000 metres excessive dust or vibration flammable gases corrosive or explosive atmospheres or extremes of temperature outside the ambient range 0 to 50 C Maximum storage temperature allowed is 20 to 70 C Operation in vehicles or other transportable installations that are equipped to provide a stable environment is permitted If such vehicles do not provide a stable environment safety of the equipment to EN 60950 may not be guaranteed Installation
184. n the buffer Upon receipt of the 101 event the first received event is automatically deleted and so on maintaining the maximum 100 events Allows the user to clear the contents of the Event Buffer by pressing CLEAR on the keypad Displays the estimated receive signal level as seen by the Demodulator Displays the estimated as seen by the demodulator Remote EB NO displayed when modem is configured for Radyne AUPC Displays the estimated channel error rate before decoding measured by the modem The CBER display shows an estimated corrected bit error rate of the modem Depending on the symbol rate the modem is running the high end performance scale of this display will vary 10 E 10 or 1015 At some symbol rates a better than scale DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem BIT ERRORS FREQ OFFSET TOTAL PACKETS ERROR PACKETS PKT ERROR RATE PKT STATS RESET LINK STATUS menu User Interfaces reading will appear as 0 0 x 10 At other symbol rates it will appear as E In either case they both mean performance is better than the scale upper limit Displays the current error count from the Viterbi Decoder Displays the received carrier frequency offset as measured by the modem Displays the total number of Ethernet packets received from the satellite Only visible when Ethernet is selected as the interface type Displays the number of error Ethernet packets received from the satellite
185. nan aT AETA nnn tei e Rennes 5 22 3156 EEE NE OE BORSE 5 22 m ote cote eter Cette et eto ete e M ce e eee 5 22 29 82 v 5 22 5 16 HSSI Ethernet erreurs eere ter aee 5 22 5 17 Ethernet Data Interface eiecit Krian Pao ae st eae eese NED ANE nakaa 5 23 5 18 GIgE Interface ede eere Erreur eru reete Peso ee eos oe Pa epe Eo ENS end 5 23 CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 6 1 Periodic Maintenance eiie oe robore eres e eee 6 1 6 1 1 Clock Adjustment ix eeu etre esee ariete ste ete ie te eade e cete eee taste 6 1 6 2 Troubleshooting es scccsccrsccsesssceccscenssestasascostccnscessasecessecovsnsseagacsooscoesdessesecessecesssesdensccnesssssdesdesacessoees 6 2 6 2 1 Alarm Faults 6 2 6211 Mayor Ex Alarms idee ient eet eet 6 2 0 212 Maj r Rx Alarms eee detiene dede esate eae 6 3 6 2 1 3 Minor Tx Alarms iiec EP re e eet e eb ei 6 3 6 2 1 4 Minor Rx Alarnis 2 nne a a a AL eee Re 6 3 6 2 15 Dropsand Insert Alarmss air ertt E T mn ee RE ETE E geben a 6 4 6 2 1 6 Common Maj r Alarms ee oed tg i e St eee 6 4 6 2 2 Adarm 6 5 6221 Active ATIS uui i E TE
186. necessary adjustments to bring it within specification and repeat measurements in Step 1 and 2 Also verify that the RSL is within spec Now without changing the transmit power levels turn ON both the carriers on the same frequency and turn CnC ON gt Eb No at Site A and B gt RSL at Site A and B Now compare Eb No in presence of 2 over lapping carriers with CnC with Eb No when only 1 carrier was ON Eb No variation should be within spec for that modulation FEC and PSD ratio The test can be repeated for different PSD ratio and Eb No MN DMD50 Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 14 11 Validating Carrier in Carrier Performance Carrier in Carrier performance can be easily validated by verifying that Eb No degradation due to Carrier in Carrier is within published specification for the observed Power Spectral Density Ratio The following procedure is recommended for validating Carrier in Carrier performance Step Procedure 1 Setup a conventional side by side link of the desired Eb No gt Carrier in Carrier should be OFF gt Record the Eb No as displayed by the Modems gt Observe the 2 carriers on a spectrum analyzer and record the PSD ratio Example Link e Full duplex 512 kbps QPSK LDPC 2 3 circuit between 4 6 m and 2 4 m antennas e Recorded Eb No 2 6 dB at both modems e PSD Ra
187. neral information showing the equipment type an overview of the equipment features and capabilities and available hardware and software options Complete technical specifications and product options are also available in a PDF format at the bottom of the screen Links to the Radyne Corporation website and Customer service is also accessible provided access to the internet is available MN DMD50 Revision 3 D 4 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Web Browser Setup Guide DMD20 Universal Satellite Modem Introduction Introduction Overview Radyne s new DMD20 Satelite Modem breaks new ground in flexibility operation and cost With standards including IOR IBS and DVB and covering data rates up to 20 Mbps this IRU duplex modem covers virtually your satelite IP Telecom Video and Intemet applications Switch between spur free 70 140 MHz operation and L Band without any configuration changes all same box Better All Around The extensive kst of software options allows for the deployment of a modem with today s needs while keeping an eye toward tomorrow These options can be purchased and then activated in seconds the front panel Additional hardware options tke Turbo Interface Expansion High Stability and DC operation complete the modem s dynamic feature coverage The DMD20 s impressive remote accessibikty surpasses all others in the field Remote control via your favorite Web Browser Radyne s trusted RLLP
188. nly displayed when SCC Framing is selected NONE 188 204 when using DVB Network Specifications INV TERR amp BASE INV BASEBAND INV TERR DATA NONE Allows the user to invert the Tx Data polarity NONE SWAPPED Allows the user to swap the I amp Q Channels when using BPSK modulation VOICE X2 DATA 64KBPS IDR ESC Channel used for Voice or 64 K data channel Only available when IDR Network is selected The LOCAL AUPC CONFIGURATION Menu contains the local configuration parameters for the AUPC Function DISABLED NEARSIDE RADYNE EFDATA DISABLED Allows the user to enable or disable the Local AUPC Function of the local modem EFDATA Enables EFDATA Local AUPC Function In the event that the remote or local demodulator losses lock the output power level will adjust itself to the level settings indicated in the REMOTE CL ACTION Menu or the LOCAL CL 4 8 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem NOMINAL TX POWER MINIMUM TX POWER MAXIMUM TX POWER TARGET Eb No MN DMD50 Revision 3 User Interfaces RADYNE Enables Radyne Local AUPC Function In the event the remote demodulator losses lock the local output power level will adjust itself to the nominal level This nominal power should be set to a level high enough to re establish communications regardless of rain fade NEARSIDE Enables NEARSIDE Local AUPC function In the event the local demodulator losses lock due to signal loss the output p
189. nsert Open Network standard In addition the selection and operation of Enhanced Async and AUPC are identical to their closed network IBS counterparts For more information on these selections refer to the appropriate section of the User s manual The following menu selections are utilized for controlling the additional functionality available with efficient Drop and Insert MODULATOR or DEMODULATOR NETWORK SPEC CLOSED NET Efficient Drop amp Insert is a Closed Network selection SAT FRAMING EFFICIENT D amp I The satellite frame type is Efficient Drop amp Insert DATA DATA RATE bps Nx64000 The data rate can be set to any N x 64 kbps rate based on the desired number of drop or insert slots The following values of N are allowed based on the terrestrial interface and terrestrial framing types shown Any framing N from 1 to 24 El Any PCM31 Any N from 1 to 31 El Any PCM30 Any N from 1 to 30 TS 16 is automatically transmitted SCRAMBLER CTRL DISABLED The Efficient Drop amp Insert mode utilizes a frame synchronous energy dispersal technique that is always on thus there is no need for any additional scrambling MN DMD50 Revision 3 1 2 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Efficient Drop and Insert D amp I 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 3 3 INBAND RATE 150 This menu is available when enhanced async is enabled This 300 field allows the operator to select a desired Earth Station to Earth 600 Station in band rate This allows t
190. ntinue 4 Demonstration Procedure The procedure for enabling a 30 day demo of the options is similar to the procedure used for permanently updating the modems feature set The one big difference being that at the end of 30 days the demo features will automatically be disabled and the modem will revert back to its permanent configuration At the end of the demonstration period when the modem reverts back to its permanent configuration an interrupt in traffic will occur regardless of whether or not a demo enabled features was being run at the time In addition operator intervention may be required to restore the data paths In order to avoid this interruption in service the user can cancel the demonstration at any time by following the instructions outlined in the section on Canceling Demonstration Mode 1 The following steps allow users to quickly determine from the front panel whether or not the desired feature s are supported by the hardware currently installed in the modem From the modem s Main Menu scroll right to the SYSTEM Menu Scroll down Scroll right to the HW FW CONFIG Menu Scroll down Scroll right to the FEATURES Menu Scroll down Scroll right to the UPGRADE LIST Menu Scroll down Scroll right through the available list of options rig ho oP The top line identifies the options and the second line identifies the options status MN DMD50 Revision 3 B 3 DMD50 Univers
191. nu Scroll down Scroll right to the FEATURES Menu The second line will display DEMO UU A third indication be found in upgrade list as follows From the FEATURES Menu Scroll down Scroll right to the UPGRADE LIST Menu Scroll down Scroll right through the available list of options Ud The top line identifies options and second line identifies options status DEMO MODE indicates that the option is has been temporarily activated and is now available for evaluation as part of the modems feature set At the end of the demonstration period the modem will revert back to its permanent configuration When it does an interrupt in traffic will occur regardless of whether or not a demo enabled features was being run at the time In addition operator intervention may be required to restore the data paths In order to avoid this interruption in service the user can cancel the demonstration at any time by following the instructions outlined in the section on Canceling Demonstration Mode MN DMD50 Revision 3 5 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Front Panel Upgrade Procedure 4 2 Canceling Demonstration Mode At any time a demonstration may be canceled and have the modem return to its normal operation Once the demonstration has been canceled it cannot be restarted using the old demonstration code In order to restart a demonstration it will be necessary to obtain a new demonst
192. o External MN DMD50 Revision 3 H 10 50 Universal Satellite Modem Drop and Insert D amp I H 2 4 D amp I Sample Configurations and D amp I Clock Setup Options The following are several examples of how to configure the modem for D amp I Also refer to Figures 3 14 through 3 17 for the D amp I Clocking Setup Options Available Example 1 Drop 512 Kbps from a T1 trunk 3 4 Rate Viterbi Insert 512 Kbps into a T1 trunk 3 4 Rate Viterbi Drop 512 Kbps from a T1 trunk 3 4 Rate Viterbi Under Interface Under TX Setup Set Tx Type according to your hardware configuration example G703BT1B8ZS Set Tx Clock SCTE Under Tx D amp I Set Drop Mode T1 D4 Use SATCh TS edit capability to define desired mapping of Satellite Channels to drop Terrestrial Slots Use Map Copy to copy Tx Edit to Tx Active Under Modulator Under Mod Data Set Data Rate 512000 Set Conv Enc 3 4 Rate VIT Under Modulator Set Network Spec Drop amp Insert Under Interface Under TX Setup Set Tx Type according to your hardware configuration example G703BT1B8ZS Set Tx Clock SCTE Under Tx D amp I Set Drop Mode T1 D4 Use SATCh TS edit capability to define desired mapping of Satellite Channels to drop Terrestrial Slots Use Map Copy to copy Tx Edit to Tx Active Under Modulator Under Mod IF Set Frequency to desired value Turn IF Output Power On Under Demodulator Under Demod Data Set Data Rate 512000 Set Conv Enc 3 4 Rate VIT MN
193. o disable or enable TPC Interleaver Valid only for Radyne turbo codes TPC 495 and TPC 793 ENABLED DISABLE Allows the user to enable or disable the Differential Decoder Having the decoder enabled ensures proper phase lock May not be adjustable in some modes NONE V 35 IESS V 35 CITT V 35 EF IBS w Optional Framing and optional Reed Solomon Reed Solomon Scrambler w Optional Framing CCITT V 35FC OM 73 35 RS TPC SCRAMBLER Turbo Codec DVB EDMAC Allows the user to select the descrambler type ON OFF Allows the user to enable or disable the descrambler operation 1 15 IBS 1 15 Async 96 Kbps IDR EDMAC EFAUPC SCC EFFICIENT D amp I None Used with IDR IBS or Asynchronous Interface Only Allows the user to select the Framing Type 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Allows the user to select the rate of in band data for the ES to ES Async overhead channel Only displayed when Effiecient D amp I with Esc Enhanced are selected 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 Allows the user to simulate the framing used by the Satellite Control Channel Option Pass Thru Mode only The SCC CTL RATIO is the ratio of overhead in band data to synchronizing words Only displayed when SCC Framing is selected 300 to 200000 Allows the user to request the rate of in band data for the overhead channel Only displayed when SCC Framing is selected NONE 188 204 when using DVB Network Spec
194. o the AUPC System First the modulator has two parameters which allow control of the maximum and minimum output power Levels Second a nominal or default power level is specified which takes effect if the receive signal or messaging is lost This nominal power should be set to a level high enough to re establish communications regardless of rain fade EF AUPC also provides some control over the rate of power change while the Radyne and Near Side AUPC use a optimized rate for rain fade compensation The AUPC Menu Functions and their descriptions are shown on Table G 1 ands G 2 Table G 1 Local AUPC Functions Local AUPC Functions Function AUPC Available Options Description AUPC MODE DISABLE NEARSIDE Enables Disables the AUPC to RADYNE EFDATA function locally NOMINAL POWER 25 dB Sets default output power to be used MINIMUM POWER 0 TO 25 dB Sets minimum output power to be used MAXIMIM POWER 0 TO 25 dB Sets maximum output power to be TARGET Eb No 4 0 TO 16 dB Desired of remote modem TRACKING RATE 6 0 to 0 5 dB MIN Adjustable in 5dB increments LOCAL CL ACTION HOLD MAXIMUM NOMINAL Allows user to determine what power setting the remote modem will use in the event of a carrier loss at the local side REMOTE CL ACTION HOLD MAXIMUM NOMINAL This setting allows users to determine what local output power setting to use in the event that the remote end has a carrier loss 1 The AUPC Menus are located under the
195. ode of the remote modem BER is reported from the 1x10 to 1x10 in tenth decade steps if the pattern does not synchronize or is out of range NO DATA will be displayed NOTE When modems are configured for Radyne the remote Eb No will be displayed in the Monitor Menus REED SOLOMON menu These selections are visible only when the Reed Solomon Option is installed ENABLE DISABLE ENABLED DISABLE Allows the user to Enable Disable the Reed Solomon Encoder RS RATE Refer to Table 3 1 for standard n k values Displays the currently used n k Reed Solomon Codes In Closed Net Mode and using the appropriate hardware the user may select custom R S Codes INTERLVR DEPTH 4 8 12 Allows the user to select the Reed Solomon interleaver depth In Closed Net Mode a depth of 4 or 8 may be selected 4 4 3 Demodulator Menu Options and Parameters NETWORK SPEC IDR IBS DROP amp INSERT CLOSED NET DVB SAT The Network Spec Command sets a number of parameters within the modem to meet a specification The purpose is to eliminate keystrokes and potential compatibility problems MN DMD50 Revision 3 4 11 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem STRAP CODE MN DMD50 Revision 3 User Interfaces Data rates not covered by a given mode will not be allowed If the mode of operation is selected after the data rate has been entered then the data rate must be compatible with the desired mode of operation or the Network Spe
196. ode that is required to be entered in the ID code field Once the new ID code is entered the modem will activate the new features Refer to Appendix B for upgrade procedures Strap Codes The Strap Code is a quick set key that sets many of the modem parameters For quick setup of the modem Strap Codes are very helpful When a Strap Code is entered the modem is automatically configured for the code s corresponding data rate overhead code rate framing scrambler type and modulation An example of how to set a strap code follows Example In the Ethernet interface lt Modulator gt Menu depress the Transmit Gel tab then move the cursor down and depress General Now move the cursor over to Strap Code Click inside the box and enter the new strap code submenu and enter 16 The DMD50 will be automatically configured to the parameters shown below in the highlighted row Strap Code 16 Refer to Appendix D or the various strap code options MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 48 Chapter 4 User Interfaces 4 1 User Interfaces This section contains information pertaining to the user interfaces for the modem There are four user intefaces available for the modem These are Front Panel Interface Refer to Section 4 2 Terminal Interface Refer to Section 4 6 RS485 Remote Port Interface RLLP Refer to the Section 4 9 Ethernet Remote Port Interface SNMP Refer to Section 4 10 Ethernet Remote Port Interface Web
197. odem for Efficient Drop amp Insert Mode Prerequisite In order for a modem to be configured for Efficient Drop amp Insert the modem must have a G 703 Interface card installed and Drop amp Insert option must be enabled If the modem does not have the required hardware and or feature set enabled contact your Radyne sales representative to order the appropriate hardware and or feature set upgrade If the modem has the appropriate hardware but the software revision is prior to AY you will need to download the latest modem firmware from the Radyne FTP website The following menus illustrate how to determine whether or not the modem has the required hardware and feature set options SYSTEM HW FW CONFIG FIRMWARE F05058 AY 6 1 or later required SYSTEM HW FW CONFIG TERR INTFC BRD 01 AS 4975 or later equivalent required SYSTEM HW FW CONFIG FEATURES UPGRADE LIST MN DMD50 Revision 3 1 1 50 Universal Satellite Modem Efficient Drop and Insert D amp I D amp I INSTALLED required ENH ASYNC INSTALLED optional required if desired AUPC INSTALLED optional required if desired 13 Efficient Drop amp Insert Mode With Efficient Drop amp Insert the terrestrial interface selections terrestrial framing modes terrestrial to satellite mapping ES to ES channel satellite and terrestrial backward alarm functionality and the In Station Prompt and Deferred Service alarm operation are identical to that of the Drop amp I
198. of Operation 3 14 10 Carrier in Carrier Commissioning and Deployment Prior to commissioning a Carrier in Carrier link it is critical that the link is fully tested in non Carrier in Carrier mode and all system issues including external interference antenna pointing cabling SSPA backoff are resolved Only after the link is robust should the user attempt turning on Carrier in Carrier The following procedure is recommended for Carrier in Carrier commissioning and deployment Step Procedure 1 Turn ON the carrier at Site A Carrier from Site B is OFF CnC function is OFF at both sites gt Using a spectrum analyzer measure Co No No at the input to the modem at Site A gt Using a spectrum analyzer measure Co No No at the input to the modem at Site B gt Measure record Eb No at Site B Make sure there is sufficient margin to account for CnC gt Measure record Receive Signal Level RSL at Site Turn OFF the carrier at Site A Turn ON the carrier at Site B CnC function is OFF at both sites gt Using a spectrum analyzer measure Co No No at the input to the modem at Site A gt Using a spectrum analyzer measure Co No No at the input to the modem at Site B gt Measure record Eb No at Site A Make sure there is sufficient margin to account for CnC gt Measure record RSL at Site B Using Co No No readings calculate PSD ratio at Site A and Site B If it is not within specification make
199. of clocking options available to the user at the Front Panel SCT Internal Oscillator SCTE External Tx Terrestrial Clock Rx Satellite Clock 3 7 1 1 SCTE Serial Clock Transmit External The SCTE clock is the Transmit Terrestrial Clock associated with the data interface SCTE is an external clock received from the terrestrial equipment and the modem utilizes the terrestrial clock to lock the internal clock In Figure 3 9 the Transmit Terrestrial Data enters the modem and is clocked into a dejitter FIFO Data is clocked out of the FIFO by the Modulator Clock The Modulator Clock and Phase Locked Loop PLL in conjunction with the Dejitter FIFO which reduces the input jitter Jitter reduction exceeds the jitter transfer specified in CCITT G 821 SCTE is sometimes referred to as Tx Terrestrial Timing or Terminal Timing Terminal Timing is reference to the RS422 synchronous interfaces 3 7 1 2 SCT Serial Clock Transmit 3 7 2 The SCT clock can be generated internally or recovered from the satellite The SCT clock source can be used as the TX clock source RX Buffer Clock source and the Terrestrial Terminal equipment for clocking the transmit data If the SCT clock is recovered from the satellite then it is referred to as SCR SCR is also referred to as Receive Clock Satellite Clock or Receive Timing RT When SCT clock is configured as Internal the frequency of the clock is set the same as the Transmit Terrestrial Clock ra
200. omes necessary to remove the cover the user should ensure that the cover is correctly re fitted before normal operation commences vi DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Revision 3 Preface MN DMD50 Warranty Policy Comtech EF Data products are warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a specific period from the date of shipment and this period varies by product In most cases the warranty period is two years During the warranty period Comtech EF Data will at its option repair or replace products that prove to be defective Repairs are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or a 90 day extended warranty whichever is longer Contact Comtech EF Data for the warranty period specific to the product purchased For equipment under warranty the owner is responsible for freight to Comtech EF Data and all related customs taxes tariffs insurance etc Comtech EF Data is responsible for the freight charges only for return of the equipment from the factory to the owner Comtech EF Data will return the equipment by the same method i e Air Express Surface as the equipment was sent to Comtech EF Data All equipment returned for warranty repair must have a valid RMA number issued prior to return and be marked clearly on the return packaging Comtech EF Data strongly recommends all equipment be returned in its original packaging Comtech EF Data Corporation s obligations under this warranty are limited to repa
201. on Set Buffer Size Set Framing to 1 15 Set mode to IBS Under Demod IF Menu Set desired Rx frequency Under Demod Data Menu Set code rate to 3 4 VIT Set data rate for 1544000 Under Interface Menu Set Interface type Set Buff clock selection Set Buffer Size Method 2 Under Interface Menu Set Interface type Set Buff clock selection Set Buffer Size Set Demod strap code to 120 Under Demod IF Menu Set desired Rx frequency E 3 3 Case 3 Closed Network 3 4 Rate Viterbi IBS Overhead Starting with the Data Rate 512 Kbps Modulator Method 1 Under Interface Menu Set Interface type Set Tx clock selection MN DMD50 Revision 3 E 8 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Strap Codes Set mode to IDR Under Mod Data Menu Set code rate to 3 4 VIT Set Framing for 1 15 Under Mod IF Menu Set desired Tx frequency and power level Turn IF ON Method 2 Under Interface Menu Set Interface type Set Tx clock selection Set Mod strap code to 101 Under Mod IF Menu Set desired Tx frequency and power level Turn IF on Demodulator Method 1 Under Interface Menu Set Interface type Set Buff clock selection Set Buffer Size Set mode to Closed Net Under Demod IF Menu Set desired Rx frequency Under Demod data Menu Set code rate to 3 4 VIT Set Framing for 1 15 Method 2 Under Interface Menu Set Interface type Set Buff clock selection Set Buffer Size Set Demod strap code to 101 Under Demod IF Menu Set desired Rx frequenc
202. on changes and during power up but should not stay illuminated Alarms are grouped into Transmit and Receive Alarms Transmit and Receive are completely independent 6 2 2 1 2 Minor Alarms Minor Alarms indicate that a problem may persist outside the modem such as loss of Terrestrial Clock loss of terrestrial data activity or a detected transmit or receive AIS condition Alarms are grouped into Transmit and Receive Alarms Transmit and Receive are completely independent MN DMD50 Revision 3 6 5 DMD50 Univeral Satellite Modem Maintenance and Troubleshooting 6 2 2 1 3 Common Equipment Faults Common equipment faults indicate hardware or configuration problems in the modem that effect both transmit and receive operation Most common faults indicate a hardware failure within the modem such as a bad power supply Common faults for the External Reference and External Clock indicate a bad modem configuration not a hardware failure 6 2 2 2 Latched Alarms Latched Alarms are used to catch intermittent failures If a fault occurs the fault indication will be latched even if the alarm goes away After the modem is configured and running it is recommended that the Latched Alarms be cleared as a final step 6 2 2 3 Backward Alarms Backward Alarms are alarms that are fed back to or received from the other end of the satellite link In IBS Mode including Drop amp Insert Backward Alarm 1 is the only one used It would be received if the dis
203. or factory test only IF RX LVL OFFSET Used for factory test only LB RX LVL OFFSET Used for factory test only POWER SOURCE Used for factory test only MN DMD50 Revision 3 4 39 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem TERR INTFC BRD CODEC BOARD menu TPC FPGA IMAGE RS FPGA IMAGE User Interfaces Indicates the Radyne assembly number for the Terrestrial Interface Assembly Indicates the Radyne part number for the Codec Board Used for factory test only Used for factory test only TPC CODEC IMAGE Used for factory test only FRONT PANEL BOARD Indicates the Radyne assembly number for the front panel board FEATURES menu 5012 2840 2417 Allows the user to install purchased feature upgrades see Appendix A Contact the ustomer Service Department or Sales for hardware and software upgrades UPGRADE LIST menu The following identifies the available upgrade features MN DMD50 Revision 3 10 MBPS 20 MBPS 52 MBPS The highest option installed will hide the lower RXIF RXLBAND TXIF TXLBAND ENH ASYNC IDR SEQ RS RS CUSTOM IBS D amp I AUPC 8PSK rates 4 40 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem 16QAM User Interfaces TURBO 52 MBPS OM73 SCRAMBLING DVB EDMAC 4 4 8 Test Menu Options and Parameters TX TEST PATTERN RX TEST PATTERN PATTERN SYNC TST PAT ERR CNT TST PATT BER RESTART TST ENTER NONE 2047 215 1 2 23 1 Allows the user to enable the
204. ort Any non inserted timeslots in the G 704 Frame will be filled with the appropriate Idle Code refer to Figure H 5 SD DDI DDO IDI Terrestrial Trunk Figure H 4 Insert Only with Eternal Frame Source MN DMD50 Revision 3 H 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Drop and Insert D amp I SD DDI DDO IDI RD IDO Terrestrial Trunk Figure H 5 Insert Only with Internal Frame Source H 1 3 Mode Selection D amp I can be easily configured to support several commonly used terrestrial data formats For El Data the user can choose between PCM 30 PCM 30C PCM 31 and PCM 31C For T1 Data the user can choose between T1 D4 T1 ESF and SLC 96 The following paragraphs provide more information on the various mode selection capabilities H 1 3 1 PCM 30 The PCM 30 Mode of Operation supports an E1 Interface with Multiframe Alignment MFAS and Channel Associated Signaling CAS The user may independently program n timeslots to drop and n timeslots to insert where n 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15 16 20 24 or 30 In addition to the selected drop timeslots the Transmit Function also extracts the appropriate ABCD signaling bits from terrestrial timeslot 16 for transmission in IBS Frame as required Conversely the Receive Function extracts received ABCD signaling bits from the IBS Frame and inserts them in timeslot 16 of the appropriate terrestrial frame This transmission and reception of ABCD signaling based upon the
205. otation for PSK Modulation Normal meets the IESS Specification QPSK BPSK OQPSK 8PSK 16QAM Allows the user to select the modulation type Intelsat 0 35 DVB SAT 0 35 DVB SAT 0 25 DVB SAT 0 20 Allows the user to set the spectral shape of Tx Data Filter 4 6 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem COMPENSATION DATA menu DATA RATE bps SYMB RATE sps INNER FEC TPC INTERLEAVER DIFF CODING SCRAMBLER SEL SCRAMBLER CTRL SAT FRAMING MN DMD50 Revision 3 User Interfaces 0 0 1 0 Allows you to offset output power by up to 1 dbm This is intended as a correction for user cabinet connectors Refer to Technical Specs for Data Rates Allows the user to set the Data Rate in bps steps via the Front Panel Arrows or Keypad Allows the user to view the Symbol Rate Viterbi 1 2 3 4 7 8 None Optional FEC Rates Sequential 1 2 3 4 7 8 Trellis 8PSK Turbo lt 20Mbps 793 495 3 4 7 8 Turbo gt 20Mbps 750 875 CSC 3 4 DVB VIT 2 3 5 6 DVB Trellis 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 9 LDPC B O QPSK 1 2 2 3 3 4 LDPC 8PSK 2 3 3 4 LDPC 8QAM 2 3 3 4 LDPC QPSK OQPSK 11 2 2 3 3 4 LDPC 160AM 3 4 Allows the user to select the Rx Code Rate and Type DISABLE ENABLF Allows user to disable or enable the TPC Interleaver Valid only for Radyne turbo codes TPC 495 and TPC 793 ENABLED DISABLE Allows the user to enable or disable the Differential Encoder Having t
206. ots to insert where n 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15 16 20 24 or 30 Robbed Bit Signaling RBS is handled without any need for operator intervention and is transparent to the user H 1 4 Multidestinational Systems Because the Drop and Insert Functions are completely independent so multi destinational communications are easily supported Figure H 6 illustrates a Multi destinational System with one Hub site and three remote sites At the Hub site thirty channels are being transmitted to all three remote sites and a fractional set of channels is being received from each remote site At the other end of the link each remote site is transmitting a fractional 1 to the Hub site as well as receiving all 30 channels from the Hub site It also identifies those channels intended for it and inserts them into the terrestrial data stream MN DMD50 Revision 3 H 5 50 Universal Satellite Modem Drop and Insert D amp I H 1 5 Drop and Insert Mapping The following displays under Interface D amp I Setup both Tx and Rx are editing displays only SATCh TS Enter to Edit Any changes made in these displays are made on the screen but are not entered into the modem Once these menus are configured the Mapping Menu must be used to actually enter the settings into the modem E1 Trunk Remote Site 1 E1 Trunk E1 Trunk Remote Site 3 Figure H 6 Multidestinational Communications MN DMD50 Revision 3 H 6 50 Univer
207. ower level will adjust itself to the nominal level This nominal power should be set to a level high enough to re establish communications regardless of rain fade 10 TO 25 dB This allows the user to set the nominal Transmit Power The nominal transmit power is the default output power level 0 to 25 dB This allows the user to set the minimum Transmit Power EFDATA AUPC When configured for EFDATA AUPC the minimum Transmit Power is the lowest power setting that will be used when the local modem commands a decrease of the Transmit Power from the Remote modem RADYNE When configured for Radyne AUPC the minimum Transmit Power is the lowest power setting that will be used when the remote modem commands a decrease of the Transmit Power from the Local modem NEARSIDE When configured for NEARSIDE AUPC the minimum Transmit Power is the lowest power setting that will be used by the local modem when the Eb No increases above the Eb No target 0 to 25 dB This allows the user to set the maximum Transmit Power EF AUPC When configured for EF AUPC the maximum Transmit Power is the highest power setting that the local modem will use when the local modem commands an increase in Transmit power from the Remote modem RADYNE When configured for Radyne AUPC the maximum Transmit Power is the highest power setting that will be used when the remote modem commands an increase of the Transmit Power from the Local modem NEARSIDE When conf
208. perature in the rack should be between 10 and 35 C and held constant for best equipment operation The air available to the rack should be clean and relatively dry The DMD50 units may be stacked one on top of the other up to a maximum of 10 consecutive units before providing one RU of space for airflow Demodulator units should not be placed immediately above a high heat or EMF generator to ensure the output signal integrity and proper receive operation Do not mount the in an unprotected outdoor location where there is direct contact with rain snow wind or sun The is designed for indoor applications only Shielded cables with the shield terminated to the conductive backshells are required in order to meet EMC directives Cables with insulation flammability ratings of 94 VO or better are required in order to meet low voltage directives The unit CANNOT have rack slides mounted to the side of the chassis Cooling fans are mounted on the right hand side of the unit IMPORTANT Jf the unit is to be mounted in a rack ensure that there is adequate clearance for ventilation particularly at the sides In rack systems where there is high heat dissipation forced air cooling must be provided by top or bottom mounted fans or blowers Under no circumstance should the highest internal rack temperature be allowed to exceed 50 C 122 F PROPER GROUNDING PROTECTION REQUIRED The installation instructions require that the integrity of the protective e
209. ps 512 kbps The traditional link was based on QPSK TPC 3 4 and required 0 96 MHz of leased BW The LST summary for the traditional link is as follows Link 1 Link 2 Number of links Modulation QPSK QPSK Information Rate 5120 5120 FEC Code Rate 7500 7500 R S Code Rate N A Clear Sky Eb No Available 9 3 8 7 Number of Assigned Carriers r 1 1 Transmit ES Code 4 6M Transmit ES Size 46 24 Receive ES Code Receive ES Size 24 4 6 Receive ES G T 29 0 Total Leased Resource Usage LST calculated Total BW allocated MultiCamier Txpdr Lease Total BW PEB Total EIRP utilized 201 dBW Total BW utilized Total EIRP available 209 dBW Total BW available Margin available utilized 9 Margin available utilized Allocated BW 0 9557 MHz PEB 0 8208 MHz Leased BW 0 9557 MHz Carrier in Carrier link design involved trying different Modulation amp FEC Code Rates to find the optimal combination 8 QAM LDPC 2 3 with Carrier in Carrier e QPSK LDPC 3 4 with Carrier in Carrier e QPSK LDPC 2 3 with Carrier in Carrier e QPSK LDPC 1 2 with Carrier in Carrier LST is Intelsat s Lease Transmission Plan Program MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 30 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation Link parameters and LST summary for QPSK LDPC 2 3 with Carrier in Carrier is as follows Digital Carrier Definition Select From Available Products amp Modems
210. que address Refer to the IT administrator for the correct address setting Example Modem IP Address setting 172 018 100 215 6 SERVER IP ADDR This allows for the setup of the Network Server IP Address This section refers to the Host that will be used to optionally boot the DMD50 on power up and is the SNMP Trap Server This IP Address needs to be consistent with the Modem IP Address Broadcast and loop back addresses will not be allowed Example Server IP Address setting 172 018 004 250 MN DMD50 Revision 3 F 2 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem TCP IP Ethernet Setup 7 ROUTER IP ADDR This allows for the setup of the Network Router IP Address If a router is present on the local network and it is to be used this address must be consistent with the IP Address Mask and the subnet of the modem If no router is present then the address should be set to a foreign address Broadcast and loop back addresses will not be allowed Router not used example Router IP Address setting 010 000 001 001 8 MODEM EADDR This displays the Modem Unit Ethernet Address The Modem Ethernet Address is configured at the factory It is a unique Radyne equipment identifier Address Example 0010650903EB 9 ETHER RATE This displays the current Ethernet port data rate If multiple rates are available then a selection can be made to specify the Ethernet port data rate 10 Example Ethernet port Data Rate 10 MBPS HD F 3 Network Configuration Summ
211. ral density of Co No Carrier 1 the interfering carrier and the desired carrier If Psp looking at the 2 carriers side by side on a spectrum analyzer Co No Carrier 2 MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 41 0 50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation Eb No Ratio of Energy per bit Eb to Noise density No Unit is dB C N Carrier Power C to Noise N ratio Unit is dB C No Carrier Power C to Noise Density N ratio Unit is dBHz Co No No Carrier Density C Noise N to Noise Density 4 ratio Unit is dB C N C N 10 log where is bandwidth in Hz No C N 10 log R where is data rate in bits sec 10 log B 10 log C N 10 log Spectral Efficiency EN 10 log 10 9 0 _ 4 _ 10 log Spectral Efficiency Spectral Efficiency is in bps Hz MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 42 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 15 Satellite Control Channel SCC The SCC format uses a variable overhead rate to transmit an asynchronous data channel in addition to the normal data channel The SCC asynchronous mode implemented on the DMD50 is PassThru Mode 3 15 1 SCC Framing Structure Each SCC frame consists of the following 10 bit synchronization pattern called the Synchronizing Word Multiple variable length slots filled with user data Multiple 10 bit control words that contains eight bits of in band
212. ransmit ES elevation angle Uplink EIRP per Pathloss at uplink frequency Gain of 1 m2 antenna Per carrier FD SC SC pattem advantage ES Per carrier BE FD arriving SC Transponder BE SFD Per carrier input back off Per carrier output back off Transponder BE saturation EIRP PSD Link 1 16 8 10 Log 2 0479 1000000 46 3 dBW Hz MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 38 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem 3 14 14 2 Estimating PSD Ratio from Satmaster Carrier A to B Space Segment Utilization Overall link availability Information rate inc overhead Transmit rate Symbol rate Occupied bandwidth Noise bandwidth Minimum allocated bandwidth required Allocated transponder bandwidth Percentage transponder bandwidth used Used transponder power Percentage transponder power used Carrier B to A Space Segment Utilization Overall link availability Information rate inc overhead Transmit rate Symbol rate Occupied bandwidth Noise bandwidth Minimum allocated bandwidth required Allocated transponder bandwidth Percentage transponder bandwidth used Used transponder power Percentage transponder power used Theory of Operation units PSD Carrier Ato 10 2400 22 57 10 Log 3 4133 x 105 533 42 76 dBW Hz 42087 PSD Carrier B to A 4 2667 40 81 dBW Hz PSD Ratio 1 95 dB Value 99 800 epe 42067 CnC Ratio 4 2667 1 95 dB 3 14
213. ration This would be used with E1 frames where time slot 16 is not used for the multiframe alignment signal and therefore channels 1 through 30 are mapped directly with time slots 1 through 30 ROM Map 7 could also be used as the template for an Active Transmit Drop and or Active Receive Insert Map with a modulator and or demodulator configured for 1024 Kbps operation This would be used with T1 or E1 frames where channels 1 through 16 are mapped into time slots 1 through 16 in any order Map slots 17 through 30 would be ignored ROM Map 7 could also be used as the template for an Active Transmit Drop and or Active Receive Insert Map with a modulator and or demodulator configured for 1536 Kbps operation This would be used with T1 frames where channels 1 through 24 are mapped into time slots 1 through 24 in any order Map slots 25 through 30 would be ignored ROM Map 8 could also be used as the template for an Active Transmit Drop and or Active Receive Insert Map with a modulator and or demodulator configured for 1920 Kbps operation However this mapping would be relevant with 1 frames where time slot 16 is used for the multiframe alignment signal and therefore channels 1 through 30 are mapped to time slots 1 through 16 and 17 through 31 MN DMD50 Revision 3 H 18 Appendix I Effcient Drop and Insert 11 1 2 D amp I Introduction The following paragraphs describe the menu structure and procedure for configuring a m
214. ration Manual Part Number MN DMD50 Revision 3 January 13 2011 Copyright 2011 Comtech EF Data All rights reserved Printed in the USA Comtech EF Data 2114 West 7th Street Tempe Arizona 85281 USA 480 333 2200 FAX 480 333 2161 This page is intentionally blank Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENT O ie e S 1 INTRODUDCTION 1 1 11 OVEL VIEW Aer RE 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 Features Options Installed at Time of 1 2 1 2 2 Feature Upgrades eene ee CE ed hs ees ene 1 2 1 2 3 Hardware Opt Ons tette E eene ette ee e tpe etie ed i tee e ER theme cee a 1 2 1 2 4 Factory Installed Options 3 np ee e d te ee e bt e HE e 1 2 13 Function Accessibility eee neon ao a i6 en Vu YU a aSK PERENNE Nero Re a Ina Peres 1 2 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATIQN 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 Unpacking and Inspection s icsccsscsseccssccssosescssessosasbacsscosponnsdostooessocesnnstasessonceapouassescsbessssecevsastoes 2 1 2 2 Installation Requirements o cs cesscisssisaccsssseesssnessoscossencsssaedeoedessoeasssnndeoscassveesssuatssccassesacssestbesnsssesess 2 2 2 3 MOUNTING CONSIMELALIONS wicsiccssisssesssnncossdssensesssscccssaserstesssuncessasessecesescsssoees sentsdeaccssoeess eteseccssnasts 2 3 2 4 Initial Configuration Check s ccssscs
215. ration code To cancel a demonstration from the front panel perform the following From the modem s Main Menu scroll right to the SYSTEM Menu Scroll down Scroll right to the HW FW CONFIG Menu Scroll down Scroll right to the FEATURES Menu Scroll down NONE o paro The value displayed on the top line of this menu is the 12 digit Unit ID It is displayed on the front panel of the modem as 3 sets of 4 digits in a dot delineated format indicated in Parameter Setup Chapter 4 The second line is the data entry area and is displayed as 3 sets of 4 underscores in a dot delineated format Press ENTER and a cursor will begin flashing in the data entry area Using the numeric keypad enter 0000 0000 0000 Press ENTER The modem will immediately terminate the demonstration and the feature set will revert back to the permanent configuration The Mod and Demod Test LED s will stop flashing MN DMD50 Revision 3 B 6 Appendix Carrier Control C 1 States The DMD20950 transmitter will turn off the carrier output automatically when the modem determines there is a major alarm This is done to prevent the carrier from outputting an unknown spectrum and possibly disturbing adjacent carriers This automatic drop of the carrier can be overridden by masking the alarm that is causing the fault This will keep the modulator output spectrum transmitting even when the fault occurs The following Carrier Control states are available
216. red voltage of the 3 3 Volt power bus located inside the modem 5V SUPPLY Displays the measured voltage of the 5 Volt power bus located inside the modem 12V SUPPLY Displays the measured voltage of the 12 Volt power bus located inside the modem MN DMD50 Revision 3 6 4 DMD50 Univeral Satellite Modem Maintenance and Troubleshooting 420V SUPPLY Displays the measured voltage of the 20 Volt power bus located inside the modem EXT CLOCK ACT Indicates that the External Clock is not active EXT REF ACT Indicates no activity on the External Reference EXT REF LOCK Indicates that the External Reference PLL is not locked 6 2 2 Alarm Masks The modem performs a high degree of self monitoring and fault isolation The alarms for these faults are separated into the following three categories Active Alarms Common Equipment Alarms Backward Alarms A feature exists that allows the user to Mask out certain alarms as explained below A CAUTION Masking alarms may cause undesirable modem performance When an alarm is masked the Front Panel LEDs and the Fault Relays do not get asserted but the Alarm will still be displayed This feature is very helpful during debugging or to lock out a failure of which the user is already aware 6 2 2 1 Active Alarms 6 2 2 1 1 Major Alarms Major Alarms indicate a modem hardware failure Major Alarms may flash briefly during modem configurati
217. rhead amp data to data rates For Regular Async Standard IBS the Baud Rate is approximately 1 2000 of the Data Rate listed in Table 3 3 For Enhanced Async IBS Async the Baud Rate is selectable but Data Rate is limited The maximum Baud Rate is 19 200 bps for IBS Async Two software controlled modes are designed into the card to best utilize the available bits Standard IBS and IBS The characteristics of the Channel Interface is also determined by the standard or Async mode The Async Channel can be set under software control to either RS 232 or RS 485 mode The pin assignments for both modes are shown in Table 5 3 The RS 485 Setting controls the output into tri state when the modem is not transmitting data allowing multiple modem outputs to be connected together Table 3 2 Baud Rate Examples for Standard IBS and Enhanced Mode Kbps Baud Rate Example for Kbps Baud Rate Example for Standard IBS Enhanced Mode 128 64 9 6 300 256 128 19 2 600 384 192 32 600 512 256 64 1200 640 320 128 2400 768 384 192 4800 MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 17 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation Kbps Baud Rate Example for Standard IBS Kbps Baud Rate Example for Enhanced Mode 3 41 Standard IBS Mode In the first or Normal mode all bit assignments
218. ribed below When configuring the modem for Web Browser Boot Mode must be set to NON VOL A brief description of the available selections are a Default If the Ethernet interface is not to be used select this mode No IP Address or mask changes will be allowed while in this mode of operation The following parameters will be set and will not change until the boot mode is changed The IP addresses are non accessible addresses IPMASK 255 000 000 000 e MODEM IP ADDR 010 000 000 001 SERVER IP ADDR 010 001 001 001 ROUTER IP ADDR 010 000 001 001 b BOOTp When enabled at boot time the modem will use the Bootp Protocol to automatically get names masks and IP Addresses of the modem router and server from the Network Manager This should be consistent with the tag expected by the users MN DMD50 Revision 3 F 1 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem TCP IP Ethernet Setup Bootp Server see the next menu selection for setting the BOOTp TAG If Bootp is not enabled the modem will ignore the BOOTp Tag setting c NON VOL This will allow for setting up all required IP Addresses and will store the information to the non volatile memory Upon power cycle the modem will restore the saved settings into the correct fields d IP TEST The IP Test selection is similar in behavior to the Default selection When enabled the following preset parameters will be programmed and will not change until the selection is changed To edit these p
219. rinted Circuit Card The L Band IF Printed Circuit Card consists of an analog modulation function an analog complex downconversion and two wide band digital synthesizers The block diagram of the L Band IF Assembly is shown in Figure 3 2 MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 1 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation In the modulator analog in phase 1 and quadrature Q signals are generated on the Digital Baseband Printed Circuit Card routed to the L Band IF Printed Circuit Card and modulated at the desired frequency The L Band or 70 140 modulated signal is then passed through a microprocessor controlled variable attenuator providing gain control of the output signal In the complex downconverter the signal for demodulation is amplified and sent through a variable wideband attenuator for AGC The gain controlled signal is then passed through a complex downconverter to a low IF Analog Analog Inv AA Filter Quadrature Modulator Analog Q Analog Q Inv Synthesizer L Band Synthesizer Quadrature Demodulator I Inv Demodulator Demodulator Q Demodulator Q Inv Tx IF TxLB onnector 40 Pin Header C IF Board RxIF Demodulator RxLB Figure 3 2 IF Card Block Diagram 3 1 2 Baseband Processing Printed Circuit Card The advent of million plus gate count FPGAs advanced logic synthesis tools and DSPs providing hundreds of MIPs enabled the design of a so
220. rnet WAN Major Alarm will be generated MN DMD50 Revision J 4 METRIC CONVERSIONS Units of Length Unit Centimeter Inch Foot Yard Mile Meter Kilometer Millimeter 1 centimeter 0 3937 0 03281 0 01094 6 214 x 10 6 0 01 1 inch 2 540 0 08333 0 2778 1 578 x 105 0 254 25 4 1 foot 30 480 12 0 0 3333 1 893 x 104 0 3048 1 yard 91 44 36 0 3 0 5 679 x 104 0 9144 1 meter 100 0 39 37 3 281 1 094 6 214 x 104 1 mile 1 609 x 105 6 336 x 104 5 280 x 103 1 760 x 103 1 609 x 103 1 609 1mm 0 03937 1 kilometer mE 0 621 Temperature Conversions Temperature Fahrenheit Centigrade Formulas Water freezes 32 0 C 32 0 555 Water boils 212 100 F C 1 8 32 Absolute 0 459 69 273 16 Units of Weight unii Cem ince EU Bue kilogram 1 gram 0 03527 0 03215 0 002205 0 002679 0 001 1 oz avoir 28 35 0 9115 0 0625 0 07595 0 02835 1 oz troy 31 10 1 097 0 06857 0 08333 0 03110 1 Ib avoir 453 6 16 0 14 58 xx 1 215 0 4536 1 Ib Troy 373 2 13 17 12 0 0 8229 0 3732 1 kilogram 1 0 x 103 35 27 32 15 2 205 2 679 m EF DATA BENI 2114 WEST 7TH STREET TEMPE ARIZONA 85281 USA 480 333 2200 PHONE 480 333 2161 FAX
221. rt J20 of the modem allows for complete control and monitoring of all parameters and functions via an RS 232 Serial Interface Terminal Mode can be entered from the front panel by selecting System and then Control Mode followed by Terminal The baud rate and evaluation type can be changed at the front panel by using the System gt Baud Rate Menu The Terminal Control Mode is menu driven and the allowable values for each item number will be shown To change an item type in its number followed by lt ENTER gt If the parameter to be changed requires a numeric value enter the number followed by lt ENTER gt If the parameter is non numeric press SPACE to cycle through the list of available entries MN DMD50 Revision 3 4 43 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces Items that do not have ID numbers are Status only and cannot be changed 4 7 Connecting the Terminal 1 Connect the computer to the Remote Connector 120 on the rear of the unit using the RS 232 Cable 2 Enable the terminal by selecting Terminal Mode located under the System Control Mode Menu from the front panel 3 Verify that your emulation software is set to the following 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit Modify the selection if necessary to match the settings the Front Panel SYSTEM Sub Menu contains all the Terminal Emulation Controls MN DMDSO0 Revision3 TTA DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User In
222. ry Allocated Bandwidth Bandwidth or Allocated Bandwidth or Occupied Bandwidth is the frequency space required by a carrier on a transponder For example a Duplex 1 2 048 Mbps Circuit with 8 PSK Modulation FEC Rate 3 4 and 1 4 Spacing requires 2 548 MHz 2 048 3 0 75 1 4 2 For a 36 MHz transponder 2 548 MHz corresponds to 7 078 Bandwidth Utilization Power Equivalent Bandwidth Power Equivalent Bandwidth PEB is the transponder power used by a carrier represented as bandwidth equivalent PEB Calculation Example Transponder EIRP 37 dBW Output Backoff OBO 4 dB Available EIRP 37 4 33 dBW 109 1955 26 Watts Transponder Bandwidth 36 MHz Power Available MHz 1955 26 36 2 54 424 W If a carrier uses 24 dBW its 107 54 424 4 532 MHz This corresponds to 12 59 of available transponder power Leased bandwidth Almost all satellite operators charge for the Leased Bandwidth LBW Leased Bandwidth or Leased Resource is the greater of the Allocated Bandwidth and Power Equivalent Bandwidth For example if a carrier requires 3 MHz of Allocated BW and 4 5 MHz of PEB the Leased Bandwidth is 4 5 MHz Power Spectral Density PSD Power Spectral Density PSD is the signal power per unit bandwidth dBW Hz or dBm Hz For example Signal power 20 dBm Signal bandwidth 500 kHz PSD 20 10 log 500 1000 36 99 dBm Hz PSD Ratio PSD ratio is the ratio of power spect
223. s are selected The IBS and IDR Backward Alarms are transmitted and received from the distant end of the satellite link NOTE The following alarms identify the status of the alarms received from the distant satellite end IDR1 SAT ALARM 1 IDR1 SAT ALARM 2 IDR1 SAT ALARM 3 IDR1 SAT ALARM 4 IBS SAT ALARM T1E1 SATTERR ALM MAP SUMMARY PASS FAIL PASS FAIL PASS FAIL PASS FAIL PASS FAIL PASS FAIL NONE BK 1 BK 2 BK 1 2 BK 3 BK 1 3 BK 2 3 BK 1 2 3 BK 4 BK 1 4 BK 2 4 BK 1 2 4 BK 3 4 BK 1 3 4 BK 2 3 4 BK 1 2 3 4 Summary alarm is given when criteria meets the selection above NOTE The following alarms identify the control status of the alarms transmitted to the distant satellite end IDR1 SAT CNTRL MN DMD50 Revision 3 STNDRD ON FRC OFF STNDRD Set Alarm functions in a normal configuration DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem IDR2 SAT CNTRL IDR3 SAT CNTRL IDR4 SAT CNTRL IBS SAT CNTRL T1E1 TERR CNTRL IBS TX PROMPT IBS TX SERVICE User Interfaces FRC ON Forces an ON alarm status that is transmitted to the distant end FRC OFF Forces an OFF alarm status that is transmitted to the distant end STNDRD FRC ON FRC OFF STNDRD FRC ON FRC OFF STNDRD FRC ON FRC OFF STNDRD FRC ON FRC OFF STNDRD FRC ON STNDRD FRC ON STNDRD FRC ON 4 4 7 System Menu Options and Parameters DATE MM D
224. sal Satellite Modem Drop and Insert D amp I Example For a modem w Drop amp Insert enabled at a data rate of 256 with timeslots assigned 1 1 2 2 etc At a data rate of 256 the modem will allow 4 channels to assign timeslots Under the Tx Menu assign the timeslots that are to be used to the 4 channels CH1 is assigned to TS1 Timeslot 1 CH2 to TS 2 CH3 to TS3 and CH4 to TS4 ENTER must be depressed after assigning each individual TS Once the timeslots are assigned to the channels use the Left or Right Arrow Key to scroll to the Mapping Menu This menu will appear in the following way Map Copy TKKK KKK TKKK KKK This is the menu where the channel assignments are actually entered into the modem To do this perform the following steps For the Transmit Side 1 Push ENTER to get flashing cursor 2 Use the Up Arrow Key to make the left portion of the display read EDIT 3 Use the Right or Left Arrow Keys to switch the flashing cursor to the right portion of the display 4 Use the Up or Down Arrow Key to until the right hand portion displays ACTIVE 5 The mapping display should now look like this Map Copy TX EDIT TX ACTIVE 6 Push ENTER to enter this command This tells the modem to configure to the settings that were assigned in the Channel Timeslot display For the Receive Side 1 With Rx Side Channels configured as follows CH1 to TS1 CH2 to TS2 CH3 to TS3 and C
225. scsesissescsescssesssesessesonsssesesssoosesesasiesssscoosesessesesesdsoacesesassessseseeses 2 4 2 5 Modulator Checkout scscssscssssscsscssssssssscsscsscssssensscssssensesssssssscsecsscsssssscssessssencesesssseneesoes 2 5 2 5 1 teh alias ente tee te toa edet cie er tede ert ate Ae E 2 5 2 5 2 Factory Terminal Setup doe ped Erde pe Ee Rea esl ease eden aT 2 6 CHAPTER 3 THEORY OF OPERATION 3 1 3 1 Modem Hardvware eere eee ee eese se tastes sons to seta sts EEs nRa tastes sene ta sees snu 3 1 3 1 1 L Band IF Printed Circuit 3 1 3 1 2 Baseband Processing Printed Circuit Card 3 2 3 1 3 Enhanced Interface Printed Circuit 3 3 3 2 Functional Block Diagram eese cente e eerte seen aee to sese sese ense eee se ea ases eaae 3 3 3 2 1 Front Panel vs ety ene Bens i ER RYE rere ne Te ee Y 3 4 332 2 Baseband Processing uude ed Leet a c iere d oui ene es 3 4 3 2 3 Tx Baseband Processittig 2o cet eter Ere toUere eae eesti 3 5 3 2 4 Rx Baseband Proc ssing rmes Re ce gi rete ette IRA e 3 5 3 3 Monitor amp Control M amp C Subsystem eee e eee eese eee eee
226. sing one modem and a loopback will not produce the desired results MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 8 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation t Modulator 1 4 1 I Interface BERGE Cer Framing Uni Demodulator Tx Terrestrial Loopback E Modulator P 0 Demodulator N Rx Terrestrial Loopback Interface ipta raming Unit 1 1 Modulator Demodulator Tx Baseband Loopback Interface Framing Uni Figure 3 4 Loopback Functional Block Diagram MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 9 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation Modulator Framing Unit Demodulator Rx Baseband Loopback Modulator Demodulator IF Loopback Figure 3 5 Loopback Functional Block Diagram 1 1 2 Interface Framing Unit 1 1 L Interface Framing Unit Tx Rx Baseband Loopback MN DMD50 Revision 3 Figure 3 6 Loopback Functional Block Diagram Theory of Operation DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem 3 7 Clocking Options The modem supports a number of different clocking options that can be recovered from the satellite or the terrestrial links The various clocking options allow users to determine which clock will best fit their applications Figure 3 7 gives an overview on how the modem processes the various clocks for the Tx Clock source and t
227. tant end demod drops lock 6 3 IBS Fault Conditions and Actions Figure 6 1 and Table 6 1 illustrate the IBS Fault Conditions and Actions to be taken at the Earth Station at the Terrestrial Data Stream and the Satellite These faults include those detected on the Terrestrial link and those detected from the satellite D IBS Earth Station I dad Transmit To Terrestrial NS Line Be thie ele 1 Seira i Receive Satellite Line Side 1 L 4 Maintenance Entity Figure 6 1 IBS Alarm Concept MN DMD50 Revision 3 6 6 DMD50 Univeral Satellite Modem Maintenance and Troubleshooting Table 6 1 IBS Fault Conditions and Actions includes Drop and Insert Fault Detected on Terrestrial Link Across Interface A FAI Loss of Terrestrial Input FA2 Loss of Terrestrial Signaling FA3 Loss of Terrestrial Frame FA4 Loss of Terrestrial Multiframe FAS BER of 1x 10 or Greater on Terrestrial Input FA6 Alarm Indication Received on Terrestrial Input Fault Detected From Satellite Across Interface E FAI Loss of Satellite Signal Input FA2 Loss of Satellite Frame FA3 Loss of Satellite Multiframe BER of 1E 3 Greater From Satellite Input FAS Alarm Indication Received From Satellite Input MN DMD50 Revision 3 Action In Earth Station AS1 2 IBS Prompt Service Alarm 51
228. te If SCT clock is configured as SCR the internal clock is set to the same rate as the incoming receive satellite clock SCT is sometimes referred to as Internal Timing or Send Timing ST In the event that the satellite clock is lost the modem will automatically switch over to the Internal Clock and revert back to SCR when activity is detected If SCT is selected then Terrestrial data that is synchronous to the SCT Clock is required to be supplied by the modem It is intended for the terminal equipment to use the SCT as its clock source The Autophase Circuit will automatically ensure that the data is clocked correctly into the modem Therefore a return clock is not necessary The Clock Polarity should be set to Auto RX Buffer Clock Options The modem supports a number of RX Buffer clock options that can be recovered from the satellite terrestrial links internally or externally The various clocking options allow users to determine which clock will best fit their applications Figure 3 7 gives an overview on how the modem processes the various clocks for the Tx Clock and the Rx Buffer Clock The modem allows users to select clock polarity Tx and Rx Clocks may be independently locked The following RX Buffer clock selections are available Rx Satellite Clock Recovered from Satellite SCTE External Tx Terrestrial Clock SCT Internal Oscillator MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 12 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation EXC
229. te Viterbi Outer FEC Disabled Modulation QPSK Frequency 70 000000 MHz Modulator Output Power 20 dBm Demodulator Data Rate 2 048 Mbps Mode Closed Network Satellite Framing None Scrambler V 35 IESS Drop and Insert Disabled Inner FEC 1 2 Rate Viterbi Outer FEC Disabled Modulation QPSK Frequency 70 000000 MHz MN DMD50 Revision 3 2 4 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Installation 2 5 2 5 1 To lock up modem enter Loopback Enable under Test Menu or connect a Loopback Cable from J11 to J13 on the rear panel of the modem Modulator Checkout The following descriptions assume that the unit is installed in a suitable location with prime AC power and supporting equipment available Initial Power Up Before initial power up of the unit it is a good idea to disconnect the transmit output from the operating ground station equipment This is especially true if the current Modulator Configuration Settings are unknown where incorrect settings could disrupt the existing communications traffic New units from the factory are normally shipped in a default configuration which includes setting the transmit carrier off Turn on the unit by placing the Rear Panel Switch located above the power entry connector to the On Position Upon initial and subsequent power ups the Microprocessor will test itself and several of its components before beginning its Main Monitor Control Program These power up diagnost
230. ted for each direction If both directions transmitted on the same channel each side would normally find it impossible to extract the desired signal from the aggregate due to interference originating from its local modulator However since this interference is produced locally it is possible to estimate and remove its influence prior to demodulation of the data transmitted from the remote location For the DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier cancellation it is necessary to provide each demodulator with a copy of its local modulator s output MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 27 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 1 2 Composite Signal S Copy of S with delay frequency S5 Copy of S with delay frequency phase and gain estimate applied to it phase and gain estimate applied to it Figure 3 14 DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier Signals Referring to Figure 3 5 Modem 1 and Modem 2 transmit signals S1 and S2 respectively The satellite receives translates and retransmits the composite signal The downlink signals S1 and S2 received at Modem 1 and Modem 2 differ from the transmit signals primarily in terms of phase frequency and delay offsets Referring to Figure 3 6 For round trip delay estimation a search algorithm is utilized that correlates the received satellite signal to a stored copy of the local modulator s transmitted signal The interference cancellation algorithm uses the composite signal and the local
231. ted state When in the faulted MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 19 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation state the receive end of the link will receive that backward alarm that is initiated at the transmit end of the link The user can connect whichever systems on the earth stations that they desire to these Backward Alarms Relays as long as they will supply ground to the Backward Alarm Relay Input in the no fault condition and the ground will be removed in the faulted condition For example the user could connect the Demod Summary Fault of the modem to the Backward Alarm 1 Input so that if the demod went into Major Alarm such as a Carrier Loss Backward Alarm 1 would be transmitted to the receive end of the link At the receive end it would show up as Rx Backward 1 Receive Backward Alarm 1 3 13 1 To Disable the ESC Backward Alarms If the ESC ALARMS Port will not be used and the Backward Alarm Indications are to be disabled you must connect pins 10 11 22 and 23 to pin 1 gnd on ESC Alarms port MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 20 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 14 DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier Option IN CARRIER THE USER MUST ENSURE THAT THE LINK IS ROBUST ENOUGH FOR NORMAL OPERATION ONLY WHEN THIS HAS BEEN DONE AND ALL SYSTEM ISSUES E G ANTENNA POINTING CABLING TERRESTRIAL INTERFERENCE SATELLITE INTERFERENCE ETC HAVE BEEN RESOLVED SHOULD THE USER ATTEMPT THE USE OF CARRI
232. terfaces 4 8 Terminal Screens For terminal screens refer to the Remote Protocol Manual 4 9 4 9 1 RS485 Remote Port Interface RLLP Protocol The Remote Port allows for complete control and monitoring of all parameters and functions via an RS 232 Serial Interface or RS 485 utilizing RLLP Protocol Equipment Remote Mode can be entered from the GUI interface under the System menu by selecting System and then Terminal followed by Terminal The baud rate and evaluation type can be changed at the front panel by using the System gt Baud Rate Menu Control and status messages are conveyed between the modem and all subsidiary modems and the host computer using packetized message blocks in accordance with a proprietary communications specification This communication is handled by the Radyne Link Level Protocol RLLP which serves as a protocol wrapper for the RM amp C data Complete information on monitor and control software is contained in the following sections Protocol Structure The Communications Specification COMMSPEC defines the interaction of computer resident Monitor and Control Software used in satellite earth station equipment such as modems redundancy switches multiplexers and other ancillary support gear Communication is bi directional and is normally established on one or more full duplex 9600 baud multi drop control buses that conform to EIA Standard RS 485 Each piece of ear
233. tests listed above NONE 2047 2 15 1 2 23 1 Allows the user to enable the tests listed above YES NO Yes indicates that the RX Test Pattern is in sync NO SYNC nnnn x 10 Displays the number of errors detected by the test pattern checker NO SYNC nnnn x 10 Displays the measured BER for the test pattern Allows the user to restart the test by pressing ENTER on the keypad LOOPBACK WITH ETHERNET DATA INTERFACE Usage of the modems loopback capabilities in conjunction with the Ethernet data interface can produce undesirable network loops In order to run any type of data test with an Ethernet interface you must utilize two modems connected back to back Simply using one modem and a loopback will not produce the desired results LOOPBACK MN DMD50 Revision 3 IF TERR TX RX BASEBAND TX RX NONE TERR RX BASEBAND RX TERR TX BASEBAND TX IFEC TX Terrestrial Loopback is performed at the Terrestrial Interface IF IF loopback loops the IF output of the Modulator to the IF input of the Demodulator If using 8PSK or 16QAM Modulation the output power must be above 15 dB DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces TERR TX RX Enables both Baseband loopback is performed at interface between the Baseband Processor Card and the Modem Card This ensures Framer Deframer integrity BASEBAND TX RX Enables both Baseband Tx and Baseband Rx NONE No loopback performed TERR RX Distant Loop Sends r
234. th station equipment on a control bus has a unique physical address which is assigned during station setup configuration or prior to shipment Valid decimal addresses on one control bus range from 032 through 255 supporting up to 224 devices per bus Address 255 of each control bus is usually reserved for the M amp C computer MN DMD50 Revision 3 4 45 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces 4 10 Ethernet Remote Port Interface SNMP amp Web Browser This port is dedicated for Ethernet Communications supporting SNMP FTP and Web Browser The port is configured for 10 Base T communications protocols The Ethernet M amp C Interface requires a standard RJ45 Male connector Refer to Appendix D and F for proper setup of the TCP IP interface and Web Browser Setup NOTE Refer to the Remote Protocol Manual for SNMP MIB and Web Browser Menus MN DMD50 Revision 3 4 46 Chapter 5 Rear Panel Interfaces This section discusses the electrical interfaces available from the rear panel All locations are as viewed from the rear of the unit unless otherwise specified 51 Connections All connections are made to labeled connectors located on the rear of the unit refer to Figure 5 1 for the standard unit Any connection interfacing to the modem must be the appropriate mating connector MN DMD50 Revision 3 5 1 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces MAX N j ey DC POWER
235. the Network Specification is changed to something other than D amp I the D amp I specific menus will automatically disappear MN DMD50 Revision 3 H 9 50 Universal Satellite Modem Drop and Insert D amp I H 2 3 Terrestrial Framing Drop Mode Insert Mode The Drop Mode Selection and the Insert Mode Selection identify the Terrestrial Data Framing Format As previously mentioned their selection is influenced by the Modulator and Demodulator Data Rates and trying to select a 1 Type Framing Format with a data rate of 1920000 bps will result in an error message In turn the selection of the terrestrial framing formats influences the satellite channel to terrestrial timeslot mappings in the following manner The selection of T1 D4 T1 ESF or SLC 96 type terrestrial framing format limits the terrestrial timeslots to values from 1 24 The selection of PCM 30 or PCM 30C type terrestrial framing limits the terrestrial timeslots to values from 1 15 17 31 In these modes terrestrial timeslot 16 is reserved for ABCD signaling and may not be dropped or inserted The selection of PCM 31 or PCM 31C type terrestrial framing limits the terrestrial timeslots to values from 1 31 Therefore the terrestrial framing format should be identified via the Drop Mode and Insert Mode entries prior to editing the Drop or Insert satellite channel to terrestrial timeslot maps H 2 3 1 Insert Terrestrial Frame Source The Insert Terrestrial Frame So
236. tication to access the mib2 OIDs and the SNMP OIDs These are of interest primarily to network operators not controlling the satellite link The dev context allows a user with appropriate authentication to access the device control portion of the MIB These OIDs are used to control the devices satellite link and operation TRAP VERSION V1 V2 MN DMD50 Revision 3 4 35 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem AUTHORIZATION RD COMMUNITY RDWR COMMUNITY FTP menu USER ID PASSWORD WEB CONFIRMATION USER 1 ACCESS GROUP MN DMD50 Revision 3 User Interfaces This controls the type of message format used when a message trap is generated by the equipment and bound for a SNMP Host Messages will only be sent if the unit has been authorized to do so TRAPS OFF TRAPS ON This controls the type of message format used when a message trap is generated by the equipment and bound for a SNMP host Messages will only be sent if the unit has been authorized to do 50 16 characters of name This menu is only displayed when SNMP VERSION is set to V1 amp V2 This is the community that a host must be acting within when an OID variable is requested by a V1 V2 SNMP message 16 characters of name This menu is only displayed when SNMP VERSION is set to V1 amp V2 This is the community that a host must be acting within when an OID variable is being changed by a V1 V2 SNMP message Allows the user to enter the user iden
237. tification for access to an FTP session Allows the user to enter the password for access to an FTP session ENABLE DISABLE NO GROUP GUEST OPER ADMIN Access rights represent the following No Group Denies Access Guest Users are able to navigate most of the site and view modem parameter settings Oper Users can monitor and and control parameter settings and change their own authentication passwords Admin At this highest access right the users can monitor and control the modems parameters change any user s name and DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem AUTH PASSWORD USER RESET USER 2 ACCESS GROUP AUTH PASSWORD USER RESET USER 3 ACCESS GROUP MN DMD50 Revision 3 User Interfaces authentication password and modify IP network settings Admin setting allows access to the entire site XXxxxxxx User to select password The user can modify the Authorization Passwords The user name can have up to 14 characters supporting alpha and numeric characters Alpha characters can be entered using the up and down arrow keys Numeric characters can be selected by using the number keys on the front panel The user can clear all characters from the front panel screen Resets group and password NO GROUP GUEST OPER ADMIN Access rights represent the following No Group Denies Access Guest Users are able to navigate most of the site and view modem parameter settings Oper Users can monitor
238. tio 1 2 dB measured at larger Antenna 57 0 Now relocate one of the carriers on top of the other carrier gt Enable Carrier in Carrier gt Record the Eb No as displayed by the Modems Calculate change in Eb No and verify against specification Example Link e Recorded Eb No 2 4 dB e Change in Eb No 0 2 dB Eb No Degradation Spec at 1 2 dB PSD 0 3 dB e Modem performance is within spec 58 0 60 0 540 MN DMD50 Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 14 12 Operational References 3 14 13 Carrier in Carrier Link Budget Calculation The following steps are required for calculating the link budget for a Carrier in Carrier Link 1 Calculate the link budget for both carriers in the duplex link with required CnC margin 1E 3 Spec limit Spec limit Rate 3 4 Rate 3 4 8 PSK Uncoded QPSK OQPSK 8 QAM 8 PSK 1E 5 Find the Eb No corresponding to the desired BER Spec limit a Rate 3 4 e Add CnC Margin 16 Q e Add any other margin Typical performance e Use this compiled value as the Threshold Eb No for the link budget 1E 8 1E 9 BER 2 Verify that the PDS ration is within spec for the Radyne DMD50 Calculate the Allocated Bandwidth BW and Power Equivalent Bandwidth PEB for the duplex link BW Duplex Link Greater of BW carrier 1 BW Carrier 2 PEBpuplex
239. tional information on the various WEB configurations and descriptions refer to the Remote Protocol Manual MN DMDREMOTEOP To verify that the Radyne product is configured with the Web interface use the products front panel SYSTEM control screen and verify that the WEB sub menu is visible Contact the Radyne Customer Service Department if the WEB feature is not displayed on the front panel to identify the product is upgradeable IMPORTANT Utilization of the Web Browser requires proper setup of the TCP IP menus The unit is shipped from the factory with the Boot Mode configured as Default Verify that the Boot Mode is set for Default To access the unit via the Ethernet port set the Boot Mode to IP TEST This will set the IP parameter to an accessible address If user wants to utilize an alternate address user must set the Boot Mode to NON VOL Contact the IT manager for proper guidance to ensure setup is successful MN DMD50O Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Web Browser Setup Guide 0 2 WEB Users Configuration Radyne utilizes authentication and authorization together with a user database and a security Realm to design a secure site This allows for the use of users and groups where users are generally people that may access the system and groups represent the position that users can hold The Modem s Front Panel has full administrative privileges allowing the operator through the Front Panel Menu entries to perform
240. to 14 characters supporting alpha and numeric characters Alpha characters can be entered using the up and down arrow keys Numeric characters can be selected by using the number keys on the front panel The user can clear all characters from the front panel screen Resets group and password 4 38 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces HW FW CONFIG menu FIRMWARE REV Displays the installed firmware revision M amp C REV Displays the installed Monitor and Control revision MAIN BOARD menu Only the appropriate of the VCO adjustment screens listed below will be displayed These are protected fields to prohibit accidental changes To edit the field the user must depress all four of the direction arrow keys simultaneously INT VCO ADJUST 0 100 Allows the user to adjust the internal frequency reference for calibration Only displayed of the system reference clock is INTERNAL HI STAB VCO ADJUST 0 100 Allows the user to adjust the internal frequency reference for calibration Only displayed if the system reference clock source is HI STABILITY LARGEST HB GAP Used for factory test only SOFT RESET Enter IF BOARD menu Indicates the Radyne part number for the IP Board Assembly AGC CTRL VALUE 0 100 Allows the user to adjust the internal frequency reference for calibration Only displayed if the system reference clock source is HI STABILITY I OFFSET Used for factory test only Q OFFSET Used f
241. to it as DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier CnC CnC was first introduced in Comtech EF Data products in the CDM Qx Satellite Modem and more recently in the CLO 10 Link Optimizer The implementation of DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier in the Radyne DMD50 has been further refined and some of the limitations that existed in the CDM Qx implementation have been overcome This innovative technology provides a significant improvement in bandwidth and power utilization beyond what is possible with FEC and modulation alone allowing users to achieve unprecedented savings When combined with advanced modulation and FEC it allows for multi dimensional optimization Reduced operating expense e g Occupied Bandwidth amp Transponder Power Reduced capital expenditure CAPEX e g Block Up Converter High Power Amplifier size and or antenna size Increased throughput without using additional transponder resources e Increased link availability margin without using additional transponder resources Acombination of any of the above to meet different objectives Summary When carriers share common bandwidth up to 5090 savings in transponder utilization is possible MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 21 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 14 2 Application Requirements The following conditions are necessary in order to operate DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier Link must be full duplex A
242. tor and control of the modem It is a 9 Pin Female D Connector Refer to Table 5 5 for pinouts Table 5 5 Remote Port RS 485 or RS 232 9 Pin Female D Connector J20 Signal Name Transmit Data RS 485 TX 485 B Direction Transmit Data RS 232 TXD 232 Receive Data RS 232 RXD 232 NC NC Ground GND Transmit Data RS 485 TX 485 A NC No Connection Receive Data RS 485 RX 485 B CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Receive Data RS 485 RX 485 A When operating the remote port as RS232 using a cable pinned 1 for 1 may cause communication failures due to miss routing of standard RS232 com port signals When operating the remote port as RS232 the cable used should only have pins 2 3 and 5 connected 5 4 12 ETHERNET J21 The ETHERNET Port J21 can be used for the Monitor amp Control M amp C Functions of the unit The physical interface is a standard female RJ 45 Connector 5 5 G 703 IDR IBS Interface Optional The DMD50O supports two versions of the G703 IDR IBS interface Interface options are G703 T1 E1 T2 E2 or G703 T1 E1 T2 E2 E3 T3 and STS1 MN DMD50 Revision 3 5 7 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem 5 6 ESC ALARM J1 User Interfaces The ESC Engineering Service Circuits Alarms Port is a 25 Pin Female Connector Refer to Table 5 6 for pinouts Table 5 6 ESC ALARM Port 25 Pin Female D Connector J1
243. tor and or demodulator configured for 512 Kbps operation The T1 or El Data in the transmit path or the demodulated data in the receive path would be dropped from and or inserted into the first eight time slots of the T1 or E1 frame The Multiplexer would know to look only at the first eight entries in the Active map s and would ignore the other 22 entries To insert data received from a demodulator into channels 17 through 24 of an E1 frame the first eight entries of the Active Receive map should contain 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 and 24 MN DMD50 Revision 3 H 17 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Drop and Insert D amp I ROM Map 6 could be used as the template for an Active Transmit Drop and or Active Receive Insert Map with a modulator and or demodulator configured for 768 Kbps operation The T1 or Data in the transmit path or the demodulated data in the receive path would be dropped from and or inserted into the first 12 time slots of the T1 or E1 frame The Multiplexer would know to look only at the first 12 entries in the Active map s and would ignore the other 18 entries To insert data received from a demodulator into channels 3 through 14 of an E1 frame the first 12 entries of the Active Receive map should contain 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 and 14 ROM 7 could be used as the template for an Active Transmit Drop and or Active Receive Insert Map with a modulator and or demodulator configured for 1920 Kbps ope
244. unit will place the new setting into the nonvolatile EEPROM making it available immediately and available the next time the unit is powered up Front Panel Control Screen Menus The Front Panel Control Screens are broken down into sections under several Main Menus Main Menus MODULATOR DEMODULATOR INTERFACE MONITOR ALARMS SYSTEM TEST MN DMDSO0 Revision3 TOA DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces 4 4 2 Modulator Menu Options and Parameters NETWORK SPEC IDR IBS DROP amp INSERT CLOSED NET DVB SAT The Network Spec Command sets a number of parameters within the modem to meet a specification The purpose is to eliminate keystrokes and potential compatibility problems Data rates not covered by a given network specification will not be allowed If the mode of operation is selected after the data rate has been entered then the data rate must be compatible with the desired mode of operation or the network spec will not be allowed The following parameters cannot be changed while the unit is in the given mode of operation IDR IESS 308 For Data rates 1 544 2 048 6 312 8 448 Mbps Framing Type 96 Kbps IDR Scrambler Type V 35 Spectrum Mask Intelsat For Data Rates 1 544 Framing Type 1 15 IBS Scrambler Type IESS 309 Spectrum Mask Intelsat IBS IESS 309 For Data Rates 2048 Framing Type 1 15 IBS Scrambler Type IESS 309 Spectrum Mask Intelsat Drop amp Insert Data Rates nx 64
245. uplex Link with DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier Figure 3 13 Duplex Link Optimization Because acquiring the delay and frequency offset of the interfering carrier is fundamentally a correlation operation anything deterministic in the interfering carrier within the correlation window of the algorithm will potentially produce false correlation peaks and result in incorrect delays and or frequency Normally this is not a problem since energy dispersal techniques are utilized in the vast majority of commercial and military modems However it is something that must be kept in mind when troubleshooting a system that utilizes the DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier technique for signal suppression One possible way to mitigate false peaks is to narrow the correlation window For example if the delay is known to be around 240ms set the minimum search delay to 230ms and the maximum search delay to 250ms As all advances in modem technologies including advanced modulation and FEC techniques approach their theoretical limits of power and bandwidth efficiencies DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier allows satellite users to achieve spectral efficiencies bps Hz that cannot be achieved MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 26 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation with modulation and FEC alone Table 3 1 illustrates how DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier when used with 16 QAM approaches the bandwidth efficiency of 256 QAM 8bps Hz Table 3 4 Spectral Effic
246. urce selection tells the Modem from where the Insert Terrestrial Frame is coming External Indicates that the terrestrial frame is to be input via the Insert Data In Port Internal Indicates that the modem needs to generate the terrestrial frame and that all non inserted timeslots need to be filled with the appropriate idle code based upon the terrestrial framing or The selection of the Insert Terrestrial Frame Source also influences the Buffer Clock selection in the following manner When the Insert Terrestrial Frame Source selection is set to External the received satellite data will be clocked out of the Doppler Buffer based upon the clock recovered from the insert data input Therefore the Buffer Clock selection will automatically be set to External and cannot be modified Attempts to select a different buffer clock will result in the error message INV ALID BUFFER CLOCK and the selection will not be allowed When the Insert Terrestrial Frame Source selection is set to Internal the operator needs to specify how data should be clocked out of the Doppler Buffer In this case the operator will be able to select SCTE SCT RX SAT or EXT EXC as the source for the Buffer Clock Therefore the Insert Terrestrial Frame Source selection should be made prior to attempting to change the Buffer Clock In most instances the Insert Terrestrial Frame Source selection will be set to External and the Buffer Clock will automatically be set t
247. urces 1 being the highest priority and 5 being the last resort The menu has three fields the first field 1s the name of the clock source the second field is the priority entry area and the last field is the depth of the list In the priority field the up down arrow keys will scroll through the list displaying the names and the current priority When the desired clock name is displayed the number keys may be used to assign a priority value Pressing Enter will re sort the list Do this until the clock sources are prioritized in the order desired Use the left right arrow keys to move the cursor to the depth field This field assigns the number of entries to use The number keypad or the up down arrows can be used to change the value Clock Source Priority SRC DEPTH RX SAT 1 of 3 Only these will SCTE 2 of 3 be used SCT 3 of 3 EXT BNG 4 of 3 Will not be used since 4 gt 3 EXT IDI 5 of 3 IRI Dest Map Allows the user to copy drop and insert maps Tx Act map is the drop map currently being used by the modem Source and destination may be any of the following TX ACT RX ACT TX EDIT RX EDIT USER 1 USER 8 ROM 1 ROM 8 1 31 1 31 The up down arrow keys allow you to traverse the sat terr pairings The slot numbers may be edited using the keypad Allows the user to edit the Tx Edit map and specify the terrestrial slots that will be dropped into the assigned satellite channels The satellite channels are fixed and the num
248. urn on the output after the reprogramming same as Carrier On Additionally VSat mode disables the modulators output is the modems demodulator does not have signal lock When signal lock returns to the demodulator the modems modulator turns the carrier back on Carrier RTS Modulator output is turned off before reprogramming modulator functions that may alter the output spectrum through the front panel and the user is required to enter Yes to re enable output after the change When using the terminal the modulator is turned off while re programming modulator functions that may alter the output spectrum and the user is required to manually turn on the output after the reprogramming same as Carrier On Additionally RTS Request To Send mode enables the modulator s output based on the RTS lead of the data interface When RTS 15 enabled on the data interface the modulator turns on the carrier when the RTS is disabled the modulator turns off the carrier MN DMD50 Revision 3 C 2 D 1 Appendix D Web Browser Setup Guide Introduction The DMD20 50 2050 Web Browser allows for connection to Radyne products through the Ethernet port The Web interface allows for complete control and monitoring of all equipment parameters and functions via a 10Base T Ethernet connection Utilization of the Web browser is dependent upon proper set up of the TCP IP menus For TCP IP setup guidelines refer to Appendix G in the manual For addi
249. ve Displays the current status of the WAN Port Displays the measured voltage of the 1 5 Volt Rx power bus located inside the modem Displays the measured voltage of the 1 5 Volt Tx power bus located inside the modem Displays the measured voltage of the 3 3 Volt power bus located inside the modem Displays the measured voltage of the 5 Volt power bus located inside the modem Displays the measured voltage of the 12 Volt power bus located inside the modem Displays the measured voltage of the 20 Volt power bus located inside the modem Displays the measured voltage of the 12 Volt power bus located inside the modem Routine delay ms Runtime Frequency Offset KHz between interferer and the desired received signal Power Ratio between interferer and the desired signal in dB 0 100 Displays the status of the Doppler Buffer Allows the user to re center the Doppler Buffer when lt ENTER gt is pressed on the keypad 4 4 6 Alarms Menu Options and Parameters MN DMD50 Revision 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces CAUTION Masking alarms may cause undesirable modem performance CURRENT ALARMS menu TX MAJOR menu Status Edit Table FPGA CFG DSP CFG SCT CLOCK PLL SYM CLOCK PLL LB SYNTH PLL IF SYNTH PLL ETHERNET WAN FORCED ALARM TX MINOR menu MN DMD50 Revision 3 Pass Fail Unmasked Masked Indicates a transmit FPGA configuration failure Pass
250. version MN DMD50 Revision 3 3 24 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Theory of Operation 3 14 4 System Functionality and Operational Considerations Figure 3 2 illustrates a conventional full duplex satellite link where two carriers are placed in non overlapping channels Ww m wv z V dri E sales mea 40 sem 4 Upconverter Downconverter Upconverter Downconverter 50 00 68m m mm DMD5SO0 Satellite Modem DMDSO0 Satellite Modem Figure 3 11 Conventional FDMA Link Figure 3 3 shows the same link using the Radyne DMD50 equipped with the DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier option Note that now only 50 of the bandwidth is being used as now both catriers are occupying the same bandwidth The transponder downlinks the composite signal containing both carriers on the same band to the Radyne DMD50 which then translates the signal to near baseband where it can be filtered decimated and then processed as a complex envelope signal The Radyne DMD50 then suppresses the version of the near end carrier on the downlink side and then passes the desired carrier to the demodulator for normal processing To further illustrate as shown in Figure 3 4 without DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier the two catriers in a typical full duplex satellite link are adjacent to each other With DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier only the composite signal is visible when observed
251. vision 3 7 12 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications 7 22 4 BER Performance Turbo 1E 1 B O QPSK Uncoded Theory 1E 2 Turbo Decoder Typical Performance 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 BER 1E 6 1E 7 Specification Turbo 0 495 1E Specification Turbo 0 793 1E 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Eb No in dB Figure 7 4 DMD50 B O QPSK BER Performance Turbo Note Eb No values include the effect of using interleaving and maximum iterations MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 13 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications 7 22 5 BER Performance 8PSK Trellis 1E 1 8PSK Uncoded Theory Ed Trellis Decoder 1E 3 Typical Performance 1E 4 1E m 1E 6 I Specification 2 3 Rate 1E 7 Specification 2 3 Rate w RS 1E 8 1E 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Eb No in dB Figure 7 5 DMD50 8PSK BER Performance Trellis Note Eb No values include the effect of using Differential Decoding and V 35 Descrambling MN DMD50 Revision 3 7 14 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Technical Specifications 7 22 6 BER Performance 8PSK Turbo
252. ware currently installed in the modem From the modem s Main Menu scroll right to the SYSTEM Menu Scroll down Scroll right to the HW FW CONFIG Menu Scroll down Scroll right to the FEATURES Menu Scroll down Scroll right to the UPGRADE LIST Menu Scroll down Scroll right through the available list of options mo Ao op The top line identifies the options and the second line identifies the following options status MN DMD50 Revision 3 B 1 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Front Panel Upgrade Procedure INSTALLED indicates that the option is already available as part of the modems feature set HW amp KEY REQ indicates that additional hardware is required to support the option Contact your Radyne sales representative for more information regarding the required hardware upgrade KEY CODE REQ indicates that the desired option is available as a front panel upgrade 2 Contact Radyne with the Unit ID and Desired Upgrades The modem s Unit ID can be found on the front panel as follows From the modem s Main Menu scroll right to the SYSTEM Menu Scroll down Scroll right to the HW FW CONFIG Menu Scroll down Scroll right to the FEATURES Menu Scroll down The value displayed top line of this menu is 12 digit Unit ID It is displayed as on front panel of the modem as 3 sets of 4 digits in a dot delineated format as follows 1234 1234 1234 Your Radyne sales representat
253. wer 48 VDC OM 73 Compatability Steps Standard Features include ReedSolomon Asynchronous Overhead Automatic Upknk Power Control AUPC and Satellite Control Channel Tochnical Specifications Product Options Troubleshooting About Us Contact Us 2006 Redyne Corporation WEB Browser Introduction Page MN DMD50 Revision 3 D 5 50 Universal Satellite Modem Web Browser Setup Guide To navigate to other parts of the site the modem needs to know who the user is to allow assignment of the proper level of transactions and resources This authentication is done through the use of a username and password The following screen will pop up as soon as entry is requested into any other web pages i e Password Set up IP Administration and Monitor and Control The factory default User Name and password defaults are listed above Enter admin for the user name and admin for the password to gain access with full privileges to the other pages within the browser Connect to 172 18 100 178 IMT Site User name admin Password 00000 C Remember my password Login Window Upon completion of a successful login the user will be able to access the other screens within the Web Browser MN DMD50 Revision 3 D 6 50 Universal Satellite Modem Web Browser Setup Guide D 7 Web Page Appearance This page displays the Monitor and Control section of the modem web interface With a front panel
254. x Submenu press ENTER then move the cursor to any position and press CLEAR along with Right Arrow key to clear all text to the right of the cursor 2 Use the arrow keys and the numerical keypad to set the desired user name Press ENTER to accept the changes Change Authentication Password 1 Goto lt USERx gt Submenu press Down Arrow to access its corresponding lower level sub menus 2 Goto AUTH PASSWORD Submenu ENTER then move the cursor to any position and press CLEAR along with the Right Arrow key to clear all text to the right of the cursor 3 Use the arrow keys and the numerical keypad to set the desired password Press ENTER to accept the changes MN DMD50 Revision 3 D 3 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Web Browser Setup Guide D 5 Change Access Rights 1 Goto lt USERx gt Submenu press Down Arrow to access its corresponding lower level sub menus 2 Goto ACCESS GROUP Submenu ENTER then move the cursor to any position and press CLEAR along with Right Arrow key to clear all text to the right of the cursor 0 6 Modem Web Site Once it is determined that the modem is reachable start the internet browser and type the modem IP address in the address field then press the Enter key File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ix 2 Ss Search Address http 172 18 100 215 The equipment Introduction page will display ge
255. y 5 4 10 EIA 530 J19 The EIA 530 Port is an RS 422 V 35 RS 232 Connection It is a 25 Pin Female D Connector Refer to Table 5 4 for pinouts Table 5 4 EIA 530 Port RS 422 V 35 RS 232 25 Pin Female D Connector J19 Signal Name Direction 1 Shield 2 Send Data A SD A Input 3 Receive Data A RD A Output 4 Request To Send A RS A Input 5 Clear To Send A CS A Output 6 Data Mode A DM A Output 7 Signal Ground SGND 8 Receiver Ready A RR A Output MN DMD50 Revision 3 5 5 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem User Interfaces 9 Receive Timing B RT B Output 10 Receiver Ready B RR B Output 11 Terminal Timing B TT B Input 12 Send Timing B ST B Output 13 Clear T Send CS B Output 14 Send Data B SD B Input 15 Send Timing A ST A Output 16 Receive Data B RD B Output 17 Receive Timing A RT A Output 18 Modulator Fault Open Collector MF Output 19 Request To Send B RS B Input 20 Data Terminal Ready A TR A Input 21 Demodulator Fault DF Output 22 Data Mode B DM B Output 23 Data Terminal Ready B TR B Input 24 Terminal Timing A TT A Input 25 No Connection MN DMD50 Revision 3 5 6 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem 5 4 11 REMOTE J20 User Interfaces The Remote Port is a RS 485 or RS 232 Connection for remote moni
256. y E 3 4 Case 4 Loop Timing Example Method 1 Under Interface Menu Under Tx Setup Menu Set INTF to RS 422 Set SCT Source to SCR Set Tx Clock to SCTE Set mode to IBS MN DMD50 Revision 3 E 9 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Method 2 Under Interface Menu Under Tx Setup Menu Set INTF to RS 422 Set SCT Source to SCR Set Tx Clock to SCTE Set mode to Closed Net MN DMD50 Revision 3 Strap Codes E 10 F 1 F 2 Appendix F TCP IP Ethernet Setup Introduction The modem supports SNMP FTP protocols and the Web Browser Utilization of the protocols is dependent upon proper set up of the TCP IP menus This document is to be used only as a guideline for setting up the TCP IP menus Contact the IT manager for proper guidance to ensure setup is successful For additional information on the various WEB or SNMP configurations and descriptions refer to the Remote Protocol MN DMDREMOTEOP TCP IP Network Configuration Using the Front Panel display and arrow keys scroll thru the System menu until the TCP IP sub menu is displayed Each unit requires proper configuration with the correct network settings Contact the IT manager for a valid IP address mask Modem server and router IP addresses Enter into the TCP IP menu and the following Sub menus will appear however the order may vary 1 Boot Mode This allows for the selection of the operating boot mode for the TCP IP Several selections are available and are desc
257. y the Modem may be used with the Radyne RCS11 1 1 Redundancy Switch or the RCS20 M N N lt 9 Redundancy Switch An Internal Engineering Service Channel Unit is available to provide voice data and alarms for Intelsat IDR applications A full range of Industry Standard Interfaces are available Interface types are selectable from V 35 RS 232 RS 422 530 ITU G 703 HSSI ASI DVB M2P and Ethernet Bridge MN DMD50 Revision 3 1 1 DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem Introduction 1 2 Configurations The unit can be configured in the following ways Features and options that are installed when the unit is ordered Feature upgrades Hardware options that are installed to a unit that is sent to a Comtech facility Hardware options that the user can install at their own location 1 2 1 Features Options Installed at Time of Order Features installed at the time of ordering are the options pre installed initialized in the factory prior to shipment These can be reviewed from the front panel Refer to Chapter 4 User Interfaces for information on how to view these features Factory installed options are chassis and board configurations that are introduced during manufacture 1 2 2 Feature Upgrades Feature Upgrades are a simple and quick way of changing the feature set of an installed modem Feature upgrades are how most options are implemented Features may be purchased at any time by contacting a Comtech Corp salesperson Refer to Chapt
258. y dims after a period of inactivity The display has two distinct areas showing current information The upper area shows the current parameter being monitored such as Frequency or Data Rate The lower line shows the current value of that parameter The LCD display is a single entry window into the large matrix of parameters that can be monitored and set from the Front Panel 4 2 2 Cursor Control Arrow Keys set of Arrow or Cursor keys 7 4 gt lt is used to navigate parameter currently being monitored or controlled Table 4 2 describes the functions available at the Front Panel 4 2 3 Numeric Keypad A 10 Key Numeric Keypad with two additional keys for the Enter and Clear function allows the entry of data into the system Table 4 2 describes the functions available at the Front Panel Table 4 2 Edit Mode Key Functions Edit Mode Key Functions Front Panel Only ee 0 9 4 E Clear amp Clear amp ype lt gt Moves Moves Fixed Point Changes Toggles Toggles Cursor 1 Cursor 1 N A N A Decimal Digit If Signed If Signed Position Position Left Right Moves Moves Unsigned Changes Increments Decrements Cursor 1 Cursor 1 N A N A Hexadecimal Digit Digit Value Digit Value Position Position Left Right Next Value Enumerated N A Value in MEE N A N A N A N A List in List MN DMD50 Revision 3

DMD50 Universal Satellite Modem

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents